2006 QUEST OWNER'S MANUAL

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and complete trip foryou and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual forimportant safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting frommodifications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2006 Quest (van)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)05/27/05—tbrooks X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

© 2005 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.GARDENA, CALIFORNIA

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar-dena, California.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM



Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9


1. 3rd row bench center seat belt(P. 1-15)

2. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-15)3. Top tether strap anchor points(P. 1-38)4. 2nd row captain’s chair seat belts

(P. 1-15)5. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)6. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag (P. 1-49)7. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P. 1-49)8. Seats (P. 1-2)9. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-55)10. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-62)11. Top tether strap anchor for vehicles

without 2nd or 3rd row seats (P. 1-38)12. Supplemental side impact air bag

(if so equipped) (P. 1-49)13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-37)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0063

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 3-13)2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-19)3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-16)5. Windshield (P. 8-19)6. Power windows (P. 2-40)7. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-9, 3-2)8. Mirrors (P. 3-22)9. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-41)12. Fog light switch (P. 2-22)13. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-12)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0013

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Lift gate (P. 3-14)4. Lift gate release (P. 3-17)5. Rear view monitor (P.4-25)6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)7. Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-19, P. 9-3)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-18)9. Sliding doors (P. 3-5, P. 3-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0062

EXTERIOR REAR



1. DVD entertainment system(if so equipped) (P. 4-54)

2. Personal lights (P. 2-45)3. Skyview roof (if so equipped) (P. 2-42)4. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-43)5. Map lights (P. 2-46), Console light

P.2-47)6. Sun visors (P. 3-21)7. HomeLinkT (P. 2-47)8. Storage (P. 2-27)9. Glove box (P. 2-31)10. Seats (P. 1-2)11. Center tray table (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30)12. Armrest (P.1-10)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0064

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Ventilators (P. 4-27)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-19)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-51)4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-49, P. 2-24)5. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-14)6. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-16, 2-17)

7. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)8. Display screen/Navigation system*

(P. 4-2, 4-8 &4-16 )9. Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-7)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)11. Glove box (P. 2-31)12. Climate controls (P. 4-28, 4-37)13. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23)14. Audio system controls (P. 4-41)15. Display screen/Navigation system*

controls (P. 4-2)16. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)17. Tilt steering wheel controls (P. 3-20)

WIC0837

INSTRUMENT PANEL



18. Rear sonar system off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-25)

19. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch (if so equipped) or Tractioncontrol system (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-25, P. 2-25)

20. Lights on demand switch (P.2-44 )21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)22. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-23)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)4. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)5. Battery (P. 8-14)6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)7. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11, P. 8-12)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)10. Fuse block (P. 8-23)11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-14)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0017

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock brakewarning light

2-8

or

Brake warninglight

2-8

Charge warninglight

2-8

Door openwarning light

2-8

Engine oil pres-sure warninglight

2-8

Low fuel warn-ing light

2-9

Warninglight

Name Page

Low tire pres-sure warninglight

2-9

Low windshieldwasher fluidwarning light

2-11

Seat belt warn-ing light andchime

2-11

Supplementalair bag warninglight

2-11

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatictransmissionposition indica-tor light

2-11

Cruise mainswitch indicatorlight

2-11

Cruise setswitch indicatorlight

2-12

High beam in-dicator light(blue)

2-12

Malfunctionindicator lamp(MIL)

2-12

Overdrive offindicator light

2-12

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS



Indicatorlight

Name Page

or

Front passengerair bag statuslight

2-9

Security indica-tor light

2-9

Slip indicatorlight

2-13

Traction controlsystem off indi-cator light (if soequipped)

2-13

Turnsignal/hazardindicator lights

2-13

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Vehicle dy-namic controloff indicatorlight (if soequipped)

2-13



1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52nd row captain’s chair adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Child restraint installation on 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27Child restraint installation on 3rd row benchseat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Child restraint installation on front passengerseat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44Booster seat installation on 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46Booster seat installation on 3rd row benchseat positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47Booster seat installation on front passengerseat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-48

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat properly. See“Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” laterin this section.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tomake sure it is securely locked.

WRS0520 WRS0521

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

WRS0131 WRS0518



FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation. The seat may movesuddenly and could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped.

WRS0522



Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRADJUSTMENT

Forward and backwardPush the levers1 and hold it while you slides2 theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

WRS0523 WRS0518 LRS0614



Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for addedcomfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in thissection). Also, the seatback can be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

WARNING



● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later in this section.

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe 2nd row captain’s chairs can be tipped for-ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row benchseat. To enter the 3rd row bench seat lift up onthe lever located on the lower base of the 2ndrow captain’s chair to tip the seat forward. To exitthe 3rd row bench seat pull back on the lever onthe lower base of the 2nd row captain’s chair andpush the seat forward.

LRS0625 LRS0626



3RD ROW BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT

Reclining

Lift up on the latch in the center of the seatback toadjust the back of the seat. Release the latch tolock the seatback into position.

WARNING



ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous section.Failure to do so can reduce the effec-tiveness of the active head restraint.

● Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

LRS0320 SPA1025



● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairactive head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from the occu-pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of thehead restraint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement and helpingabsorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-scribed earlier in this section.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

The 2nd row captain’s chairs and the 3rd rowbench seat head restraints are removable forstorage. See “Head restraint storage” in the “In-strument and controls” section. The front seathead restraints are not removable.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

LRS0286



Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

ARMRESTS

To use the armrests, pull them down to the rest-ing position.

sA Resting position

sB Stowed position

Adjustable driver’s seat armrest (if soequipped)

To use the adjustable driver seat armrest, pull itdown to the resting position. Adjust the armrestto the desired position by raising the armrest tothe desired height and releasing the armrest. Toreadjust the armrest to a lower position, raise the

armrest to the stowed position, then pull it to theresting position and adjust to the desired height.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

WRS0134 WRS0531



● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

FoldingTo fold the seatback forward, for cargo hauling,lift up on the recline lever and fold the seatbackover the seat base.

Folding the 2nd row captain’s chair

s1 To fold the 2nd row captain’s chairs to thefloor for maximum cargo hauling, remove thehead restraints. Remove the head restraintsby lifting up, then push and hold the releaseknob and place them in the storage bag.Make sure to secure the storage bag, see“Head restraint storage” in the “Instrumentand controls” section of this Owner’sManual.

s2 Lift up on the recline lever to fold the seat-back forward on the seat base.

LRS0627 LRS0628



s3 Push down on the small knob on the back ofthe seat to release the base of the seat.

s4 Then fold the entire seat forward into thestowed position in the floor.

s5 Reverse this process to return the 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs to a seating position. Makesure to properly install the head re-straints and to push the seats downinto the floor until they latch into place.

FoldingTo fold the seatback forward, for cargo hauling,lift up on the latch in the center of the seatback tofold the seatback over the seat base.

LRS0629 LRS0630 LRS0284



Folding the 3rd row bench seat

WARNING

● The 3rd row bench seat is heavy. Becareful when folding and unfolding.

● To avoid injury to yourself or others,keep hands and body clear of flooropening when folding.

s1 To fold the 3rd row bench seat flat into thefloor, for maximum cargo hauling, remove allthree head restraints. Remove the head re-straint by lifting up, then push and hold therelease button and continue lifting. Thenplace them in the storage bag. Make sure tosecure the storage bag. See “Head restraintstorage” in the “Instrument and controls”section of this Owner’s Manual.

s2 Disconnect and secure the center seat beltand tongues into the retractor base. See“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” laterin this section. Then push the button in thecenter of the seatback while pulling back onthe pull strap to release the back of the seat.Rotate the seatback toward the back of thevehicle.

LRS0291 WRS0321



s3 Pull up on the lever located on the back ofthe seat base. This will fold the seat basetoward the back of the vehicle.

s4 The entire seat will rotate toward you andstow flat in the floor.

s5 The rear seat anchors are spring loaded andcan be folded into the side panels to maxi-mize cargo space. The anchors are held inthe folded position by the items in the cargoarea. When the load is removed from thecargo area, the rear seat anchors automati-cally return to the unfolded position.

6. Reverse this process to return the benchseat to a seating position. Make sure toproperly install the head restraints,push the bench seat down into thefloor, and pull back on the seatbackuntil they latch into place.

LRS0292 LRS0293 LRS0285



WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

● When returning the seatbacks, be sureto attach the rear center seat beltconnector.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat, your chances of being injured or killedin an accident and/or the severity of injury may begreatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encouragesyou and all of your passengers to buckle up everytime you drive, even if your seating position in-cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014



There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear facing child restraint

● Front facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints and are at least 1 yearold. Booster seats are used to help position avehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

InfantsInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small ChildrenChildren that are over one year old and weighbetween 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be

placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommendations.NISSAN recommends that small children beplaced in child restraints that comply with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle and alwaysfollow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-lation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and



have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Power front seat shownLRS0607



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat, 2nd row captain’schairs and the rear bench seat three-point seatbelts have a locking mechanism for child restraintinstallation. It is referred to as the automatic lock-ing mode or child restraint mode.

When automatic locking mechanism is activatedthe seat belt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is inthe emergency locking mode. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front passen-ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138



Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Center of the 3rd row bench seatThe 3rd row center seat belt has a connectortongue s1 and a seat belt tongue s2 . Both theconnector tongue and the seat belt tongue mustbe securely latched for proper seat belt opera-tion.

WRS0139 SSS0240



WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt. Donot use it with only the seat belt tongueattached. This could result in seriouspersonal injury in case of an accident ora sudden stop.

Stowing the 3rd row center seat beltWhen folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd rowcenter seat belt can be retracted into a stowedposition as follows:

s1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seatbelt does not retract suddenly when thetongue is released from the connectorbuckle. Release the connector tongue byinserting a suitable tool such as key into theconnector buckle sA .

s2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

s3 Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabricsleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure theconnector tongue into the retractor base.

WARNING


● When attaching the rear center seat beltconnector, be certain that the seatbacksare completely secured in the latchedposition and the rear center seat beltconnector is completely secured.

● If the rear center seat belt connector andthe seatbacks are not secured in the cor-rect position, serious personal injury mayresult in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0241

LRS0432



Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt

Always be sure the 3rd row center seat beltconnector tongue and connector buckle are at-tached. Disconnect only when folding down therear seat.

To connect the buckle:

s1 Pull out the connector tongue from the re-tractor base.

s2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabricsleeve.

s3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelt” earlier in this section.

WARNING


● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

LRS0433



Shoulder belt height adjustment (Frontand 2nd row seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, push or pull outs1 the adjustmentbutton and move the shoulder belt anchors2 tothe desired position, so the belt passes over thecenter of the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder. Release the adjustment button to lockthe shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

Front seatsLRS0294

2nd row seatsLRS0242



SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

WARNING

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

● An improperly installed child restraintcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to beinstalled with the lap portion of a lap/shoulderseat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped witha universal child restraint lower anchor system,referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-straints include two rigid or webbing-mountedattachments that can be connected to theselower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

Child restraints for infants and small children ofvarious sizes are offered by several manufactur-

ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep thefollowing points in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

● Improper use of a child restraint canincrease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the belt holds therestraint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.



● If you must install a front facing childrestraint in the front seat, see “Childrestraint installation on front passengerseat” later in this section.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles beforeplacing your child in the child restraint.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON 2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS

WARNING

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

Front facing

When you install a child restraint on the 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs, follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Ad-just the head restraint to its highest position.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. The back of the child restraintshould be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint to obtain the correct child restraintfit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier inthis section. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child restraint isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.Front Facing — step 1

LRS0347



s2 Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for belt routing.

s3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the seat beltis fully retracted.

s4 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Front Facing — step 2LRS0615





s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again , or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 2nd rowcaptain’s chair, follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.


Rear Facing — step 1WRS0301





s3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-gency locking mode when the seat belt isfully retracted.


Rear Facing — step 2LRS0618





s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again , or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode.


After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT

WARNING


● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision.

● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured. See“Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt”earlier in this section.




Front facing

WARNING

Front-facing child restraints can be in-stalled in all 3rd row bench seat positions.However, front-facing child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap can beinstalled in the center 3rd row positiononly. Do not install a child restraint requir-ing a top tether strap in an outboard posi-tion and attempt to angle the tether to the3rd row center anchor.

When you install a child restraint on the 3rd rowbench seat, follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Ad-just the head restraint to its highest position.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. The back of the child restraintshould be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint to obtain the correct child restraintfit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier inthis section. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child restraint isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.Front Facing (outboard) — step 1

LRS0357

Front Facing (center) — step 1LRS0358





s3 Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode). It reverts back toemergency locking mode when the seat beltis fully retracted.


Front Facing — step 2WRS0250





s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again , or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.




Rear facingWhen you install a child restraint on the 3rd rowbench seat, follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.


Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1WRS0323






Rear Facing (center) — step 1LRS0312






s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again , or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode.


After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.





LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) anchor points are located in the seatcushions on both of the 2nd row captain’s chairsand in the center seating position only for the 3rdrow seat.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to two anchors located at certain seatingpositions in your vehicle. This system is known asthe LATCH system. This system may also bereferred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatiblesystem. With this system, you do not have to usea vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH anchor point label (2nd row cap-tain’s chairs)

LRS0631

LATCH anchor point label (3rd row benchseat)

WRS0436

LATCH system anchor locationsWRS0315



Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH system compat-ible child restraints. Check your child restraint fora label stating that it is compatible with theLATCH system. This information may also be inthe child restraint owner’s manual. If you havesuch a child restraint, refer to the illustration forthe seating positions equipped with LATCH sys-tem anchors which can be used to secure thechild restraint.

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

When you install a LATCH system compatiblechild restraint to the lower anchor attachments,follow these steps:

WARNING

Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH system an-chors, such as seat belt webbing or seatcushion material. The child restraint willnot be secured properly if the LATCH sys-tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatiblechild restraint, insert the child restraintLATCH system anchor attachments into theanchor points on the seat. If the child re-straint is equipped with a top tether, see“Top tether strap child restraint” later in thissection for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and beforeplacing the child in it, use force to push thechild restraint from side to side and tug itforward to make sure that the child restraintis securely held in place. It should not movemore than 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it mustbe secured to the anchor point provided behindits position.

WARNING

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● After removing a rear seat head re-straint for top tether installation, storeit securely to prevent it from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident. Always replace it and adjustproperly when top tether is no longer inuse.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor the LATCH system (2nd row captain’s chairsand the center position of the 3rd row bench seatonly), as applicable.

For the front passenger seat in the 2 passengercargo van only, adjust the head restraint to itshighest position and route the top tether strap



between the head restraint and the top of theseatback. Secure the tether strap to the tetheranchor point on the floor directly behind the seat.Tighten the tether strap according to the manu-facturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

For the 2nd and 3rd row seats, remove the headrestraint from the seatback. Store it in a secureplace. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seatback and secure it to the tether anchorbracket as shown later in this section. Tighten thetether strap according to the manufacturer’s in-structions to remove any slack.

WARNING

A child restraint with a top tether strap canonly be used in the 3rd row bench seat,center position. Do not place in an out-board seating position and attempt toangle the tether strap to the centerposition.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraintinstallation instructions in this section and thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the floor behind thefront passenger seat (2 passenger cargo vanonly), on the back of the 2nd row captain’s chairsand the back of the center seat position on the3rd row bench seat as shown.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

The front passenger seat and 2nd row captain’schair anchor point locations are marked with thelabel shown.

Front passenger seat(2 passenger cargo van only)

LRS0322

LabelWRS0210



1. Pull strap

2. Top tether anchor point

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental front air bags in-flate with great force. A rear-facingchild restraint could be struck by thesupplemental front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.

2nd row captain’s chairsLRS0307

3rd row benchWRS0319 WRS0256



● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat unless the vehicle is the 2 pas-senger cargo van only.


● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

If you must install a child restraint in the front seat,follow these steps:

s1 Position the child restraint on the front pas-senger seat. It should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Adjust thehead restraint to its highest position. Alwaysfollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions. Child restraints for infantsmust be used in the rear-facing direc-tion and therefore must not be used inthe front seat.

The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seat back. If

WRS0378Front Facing — step 1

WRS0379



necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier inthis section. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child restraint isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper child restraint fit,try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.








s4 Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.

s5 Before placing the child in the child restraint,use force to push the child restraint fromside to side, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. It should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull againon the shoulder belt to further tighten thechild restraint. If unable to properly securethe restraint move the restraint to anotherseating position and try again , or try a differ-ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit inall types of vehicles.


7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

8. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Thepassenger air bag status light should say“PASS AIR BAG OFF” or . Ifthis light is not illuminated it may indicate amalfunction. Move the child restraint toanother seating position. Have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.






PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

● An improperly installed booster seatcould lead to serious injury or death inan accident.

WARNING

● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

LRS0455

BOOSTER SEATS



Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seat back islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

WARNING

● Improper use of a booster seat can in-crease the risk or severity of injury forboth the child and other occupants ofthe vehicle.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

LRS0623 LRS0622



● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation onfront passenger seat” later in thissection.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS

CAUTION

Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts. When you install abooster seat in the rear seat follow thesesteps:

1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

2. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

LRS0622



BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON3RD ROW BENCH SEATPOSITIONS

CAUTION

Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts. When you install abooster seat in the rear seat follow thesesteps:






(Outboard position)LRS0512

(Center position)LRS0513



BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ONFRONT PASSENGER SEAT

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that child restraintsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger’sseat to the rearmost position.

If you must install a booster seat in the front seat,follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rear-most position.






7. When the ignition is turned to the ON posi-tion, the passenger air bag status light mayor may not be illuminated, depending on thesize of the child and the type of booster seatbeing used. See “NISSAN advanced air bagsystem” later in this section.

LRS0454



PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:The NISSAN advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system(if so equipped): This system can help cushionthe impact force to the chest area of the driverand front passenger in certain side impact colli-sions. The supplemental side air bag is designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion the im-pact force to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certain sideimpact collisions. The curtain side-impact airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Also,the front passenger air bag will not in-flate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger’s seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion. Always wear your seat belts tohelp reduce the risk or severity of injuryin various kinds of accidents.

● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.

WRS0031



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor details.

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag (if so equipped)and curtain side-impact air bag:

● The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against the door.

WRS0431



WARNING

● The seat belts, the supplemental side airbags and curtain side-impact air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near the side airbag on the side of the seatback of the frontseat or near the side roof rails. Do not allowanyone sitting in the front seats or rearoutboard seats to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against the door. Someexamples of dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations.

WARNING

● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, you maybe seriously injured. Be especially care-ful with children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

SSS0162 WRS0306 SSS0159



1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod-ules

2. SRS curtain side-impact air bag (driv-er’s side)

3. Seat belt buckle switches4. Supplemental front air bag modules

5. Crash zone sensor6. Diagnosis sensor unit7. Occupant classification system control

unit8. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)

9. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor10. Satellite sensors11. Supplemental side air bag modules (if

so equipped)12. SRS curtain side-impact air bag (pas-

senger’s side)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front air bagsystem operation.

LRS0624



The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seatbelt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based onthe severity of a collision and seat belt usage forthe driver. For the front passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-tion from the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the weight de-tected on the passenger seat and how the seatbelt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will notbe illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thesupplemental front air bags inflate quickly in orderto help protect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.




Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status lightor is located in the meters and gaugesarea of the instrument panel. The light operatesas follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: Theor is OFF and the front passenger airbag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The or illuminates toindicate that the front passenger air bag isOFF and will not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light or is OFF toindicate that the front passenger air bag isoperational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-

WRS0314 LRS0316



tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode). Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor and the belttension detected on the seat belt, the advancedair bag system determines whether the front pas-senger air bag should be automatically turnedOFF as required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF; however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), this couldcause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in anaccident or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag inflating in a crash insteadof being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in thissection for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat and the pas-senger air bag status light is illuminated (indicat-ing that the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If thestatus light is not lit (indicating that the air bagmight inflate in a crash), it could be that the childrestraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Inrare cases, the passenger air bag status light willnot illuminate even though the air bag is OFF.

If such situations happen, properly position andrestrain the occupant or child restraint. Other-wise reposition the occupant or child restraint ina rear seat. If you have any questions aboutwhether your passenger air bag is working asdesigned, your dealer can use a special tool toconfirm that it is working properly.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if a



large adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front air bag precau-tions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion system (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.



● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side-impact air bag (ifso equipped) and curtain side-impactair bags system

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontseats. The supplemental curtain side-impact airbags are located in the side roof rails. Thesesystems are designed to meet voluntary guide-lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the infor-mation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type of collision are similarto those of a higher severity side impact. They aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. They may not inflate in certain sidecollisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise maybe heard, followed by release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the impact forceto the head of occupants in the front and rearoutboard seating positions. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating side air bag and curtain side-impact airbag may cause abrasions or other injuries.Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to thelower body.

WRS0532



The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the supplemental side airbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated asfar away as practical from the door finishers andside roof rails. The side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front and rear outboard occupants.Because of this, the force of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, these air bag modules during inflation.The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bagwill deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tions.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system. This is to prevent acci-dental inflation of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag or damageto the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental sideair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial near the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.



Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the front supple-mental air bag systems. Working with the seatbelt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt whenthe vehicle becomes involved in certain types ofcollisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against thechest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.



1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning Label (if so

equipped)SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbag and supplemental side air bag systems (if soequipped) are placed in the vehicle as shown inthe illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tems. The circuits monitored by the supplementalair bag warning light are the diagnosis sensorunit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front airbag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat beltsand all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems may not operate properly. It must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

LRS0318 LRS0100



WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systemsand/or pre-tensioner seat belt systemswill not operate in an accident. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain side-impact air bags andpre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflateon a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless itis damaged, the supplemental air bag warninglight remains illuminated after inflation has oc-curred. Repair and replacement of these supple-mental air bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impact airbags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition key should alwaysbe in the LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtainside-impact air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe supplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsmust also be replaced. The air bag mod-ule and pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pre-tensionerseat belt system cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-7Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-21Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Traction control system (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-25Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Upper instrument panel storage compart-ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Lower instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Center console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Center tray table (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33


Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Cargo organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-373rd row armrest bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Garment hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Head restraint storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

SkyView™ glass-paneled roof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-42Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Lights on demand switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-47

Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-50If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50


1. Ventilators (P. 4-27)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-19)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped) (P. 4-51)4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-49, P. 2-24)5. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-14)6. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-16, 2-17)

7. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)8. Display screen/Navigation system*

(P. 4-8, P. 4-2, P. 4-16)9. Warning/indicator lights (P. 2-7)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)11. Glove box (P. 2-31)12. Climate controls (P. 4-28, 4-37)13. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23)14. Audio system controls (P. 4-41)15. Display screen/Navigation system*

controls (P. 4-8, P. 4-2, P. 4-16)16. Shift selector lever (P. 5-10)17. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-20)

WIC0837

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


18. Rear sonar system off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-25)

19. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch (if so equipped) or Tractioncontrol system (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-25, P. 2-25)

20. Lights on demand switch (P. 2-44)21. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-22)22. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-23)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

1. Tachometer2. Warning/indicator lights3. Speedometer4. Display screen*5. Odometer6. Engine coolant temperature gauge/Fuel

gauge*Refer to the “Display screen, heater, air con-ditioner and audio systems” section later inthis manual for details about the displayscreen, including how to view trip, fueleconomy and maintenance information.

WIC0734

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


1. Speedometer2. Odometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

Odometer

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

Trip odometerFor instructions on how to record the distance ofindividual trips, refer to “Control panel buttons” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section later in this manual.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine intothe red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

LIC0460 LIC0461



ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition key must be in the ON positionfor the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the reading is within thezone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

FUEL GAUGE

NOTE:

The ignition key must be in the ON positionfor the gauge to give a reading.

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

LIC0462 LIC0463



CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” later inthis section.



or Anti-lock brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime or Front passenger air bag statuslight

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Traction control system off indicator light (if soequipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if soequipped)

Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Overdrive off indicator light

CHECKING BULBSWith all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , ,,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock brake

warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti-lock function ceases, but the regular brakingsystem continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the lightcomes on while the engine is running with theparking brake not applied, stop the vehicle andperform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use the



dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. The low fuel warning chimewill also sound under certain conditions. See“Low fuel warning chime” later in this section.

Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferablybefore the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). Therewill be a small reserve of fuel in the tankwhen the fuel gauge needle reaches E(Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this lightcomes on for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning (for models with-out MichelinT PAXT tires only):

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you selectthe tire pressure information in the display, theFLAT TIRE warning message will be displayed.The tire pressure for each tire will also be dis-played.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information labelto turn the light OFF.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “Starting and driving”section and “Low tire pressure warning system”in the “In case of emergency” section.

Low tire pressure warning (for models withMichelinT PAXT tires only):

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressurethe warning light will illuminate. If you select thetire pressure information in the display, the FLAT

TIRE warning message will be displayed. The tirepressure for each tire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information labelto turn the light OFF.

Flat tire warning (for models with Mich-elinT PAXT tires only):

If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flattires, the warning light will flash continuously anda chime will sound for 10 seconds.

The chime will only sound at the first indication ofa flat tire and the warning light will flash continu-ously. When the flat tire warning is activated,have the system reset and the tire checked andreplaced if necessary by a NISSAN dealer orauthorized Michelin PAX system dealer. Even ifthe tire is inflated to the specified COLD tirepressure, the warning light will continue to flashuntil the system is reset by a NISSAN dealer.

If you select the tire pressure information in thedisplay, the FLAT TIRE warning message will bedisplayed. The tire pressure for each tire will alsobe displayed.

Your vehicle can be driven for a limited time on aflat tire. See “Michelin PAX Tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.



For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “Starting and driving”section and “Low tire pressure warning system”in the “In case of emergency” section.

Tire pressure monitor system malfunction(all models):

If the tire pressure monitor system is not function-ing properly, the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute when theignition switch is turned on. The light will remainon after the 1 minute. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning system” in the “Starting and driving”section.

WARNING

● If the light does not come on with thekey switch turned ON, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could resultin serious personal injury. Check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust the tirepressure to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If the lightstill comes on while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with a sparetire as soon as possible.

● Although you can continue driving witha punctured MichelinT PAXT tire (if soequipped), remember that vehicle han-dling stability is reduced, which couldlead to an accident and personal injury.Also, driving a long distance at highspeeds may damage the tires.

● Do not drive at speeds above 50 MPH(80 km/h) and do not drive more than125 miles (200 km) with a puncturedMichelinT PAXT tire (if so equipped).

The actual distance the vehicle can bedriven on a flat tire depends on outsidetemperature, vehicle load, road condi-tions and other factors.

● Do not tow a trailer when a MichelinTPAXT tire (if so equipped) is flat.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated and the low tire pressurewarning system will not function. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

CAUTION

● The low tire pressure warning system isnot a substitute for the regular tire pres-sure check. Be sure to check the tirepressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the lowtire pressure warning system may notoperate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.



Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied (ifso equipped). For 5 seconds after the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, the system does notactivate the warning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag (if so equipped), curtain side-impact airbags, and pre-tensioner seat belt systems needservicing and your vehicle must be taken to aNISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly.For additional details see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag (ifso equipped), curtain side-impact air bagsystems and/or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, the indicator in the tachometer shows theautomatic transmission selector lever position.See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.



Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come onsteady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make surethe fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly,and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when theengine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle isnot ready for an emission control systeminspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness forinspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction has beendetected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or installthe cap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does not turn offafter a few driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not needto have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An enginemisfire has been detected which may damagethe emission control system. To reduce or avoidemission control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on when the overdrive functionis OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function iscontrolled by the overdrive switch.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.



or Front passengerair bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light (or ) will be lit and the passenger front airbag will be OFF depending on how the frontpassenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The light

will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or doesnot go off, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction control system offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the tractioncontrol off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-cates the traction control system is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or re-start the engine and the system will operate nor-mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the tractioncontrol system (TCS) is operational. If the lightstays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-tor light while you are driving, have the tractioncontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the traction control system is operating,you might feel slight vibration or hear the systemworking when starting the vehicle or accelerat-ing, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle dynamic control offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicledynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. Thisindicates the vehicle dynamic control system isnot operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again orrestart the engine and the system will operate nor-mally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the vehicle dynamiccontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear thesystem working when starting the vehicle or ac-celerating, but this is normal.



AUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warningThe front disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a front brake pad requires re-placement, it makes a high pitched scrapingsound when the vehicle is in motion, whether ornot the brake pedal is depressed. Have thebrakes checked as soon as possible if the warn-ing sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

Low fuel warning chimeA chime sounds briefly when the low fuel warninglight initially comes on. If the low fuel warning lightturns off during the driving trip and then turns onagain, the chime will not sound.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power door lockswitch or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flash

WIC0834

SECURITY SYSTEMS



twice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Personalized settings menu” (vehicles withmonochrome screen) or “Vehicle electronicsystems” (vehicles with color screen) in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the door isunlocked by the key or the keyfob, or theignition key is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe door, the system may not arm. Fur-thermore, if the key is turned beyondthe vertical position toward the unlockposition to remove the key, the systemmay be disarmed when the key is re-moved. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition key in the OFF posi-tion.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockinga door with the key, or by pressing thebutton on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking a door with thekey, or by pressing the button on the key-fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.



Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can beadjusted by turning the knob toward sA(Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, the intermit-tent operation speed varies in accordancewith the vehicle speed. (For example, whenthe vehicle speed is high, the intermittentoperation speed will be faster.)

LIC0474 WIC0843

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion. Refer to “Personalized settingsmenu” (vehicles with monochrome screen)or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicleswith color screen) in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems”section later in this manual.

s2 Low — continuous low speed operation

s3 High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

s1 Intermittent – intermittent operation (not ad-justable)

s2 On – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward s3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WIC0844

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH



WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light comes on.Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

Type ALIC0782

Type BLIC0488

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH



HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Type ALIC0560

Type BLIC0687

Type CLIC0688

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds afteryou turn the key to OFF and all doors areclosed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-justed. See “Personalized settings menu”(vehicles with monochrome screen) or “Ve-hicle electronic systems” (vehicles withcolor screen) in the “Display screen, heater,air conditioner and audio systems” sectionlater in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain on for 5 minutes. During that 5 minutes:

● if all doors are closed, the headlights remainon for 45 seconds, then turn off.

● if another door is opened, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch tothe OFF, , or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor s1 located on top ofthe instrument panel. The autolight sensorcontrols the autolight; if it is covered, theautolight sensor reacts as if it is dark outand the headlights will illuminate. If thisoccurs while parked with the engine offand the key in the ON position, your vehi-cle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC0561 LIC0515



Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

After the headlights automatically turn off with theheadlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes ifthe headlight switch is moved to the OFF positionand then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC0390



INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-tion switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in theAUTO, or position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjustthe brightness when the headlights or parkinglights are off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

LIC0392 LIC0563 LIC0393



CORNERING LIGHTThe cornering light provides additional illumina-tion toward the turning direction. The corneringlight will illuminate on the turning direction sidewhen a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

AIC0102 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (ifso equipped). The switches are located at thesides of the seats.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the (low) or (high) posi-tion of the switch, as desired, depending onthe temperature. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leavethe vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

LIC0395 LIC0469

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCSreduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.The engine speed will be reduced even if theaccelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximumengine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.The indicator will come on.

Push the “TCS OFF” switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Tractioncontrol system (TCS)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dy-namic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is activewhen the ignition is in the ON position and theshift selector lever is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

LIC0451 WIC0534 LIC0471

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(if so equipped)



The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is turned on.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlets located inside the center con-sole storage bin and in the cargo area are pow-ered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The power outlets located on the side of thecenter console and in the 2nd row are poweredonly when the ignition key is in the ACC or ONposition.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Passenger compartmentWIC0838

Inside center console storage binWIC0839

POWER OUTLET



● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

NOTE HOLDERInsert a card or photograph into the note holder.

WARNING

Do not use note holder while driving sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

2nd rowLIC0516

Cargo areaLIC0517 LIC0498

STORAGE



UPPER INSTRUMENT PANELSTORAGE COMPARTMENTPush the button to release the lid to the 1st openposition.

You can raise and hold the lid by hand to the 2ndopen position for improved access to the com-partment.

Push the lid down to close.

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

LOWER INSTRUMENT PANELSTORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

LIC0495Driver’s side

LIC0501

Passenger’s sideLIC0500



CENTER CONSOLE

Storage trayThe center console storage tray can be used tostore a cellular telephone and other small items. Acoin holder is also located inside the tray.

Pull the latch to open the tray to the 1st or 2ndposition.

Push the tray to close.

WARNING

The storage tray should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Portable devices

WARNING

Portable devices should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

For portable devices, such as cellular phones, apower cord can be routed to the power outletinside the lower storage bin through the notch onthe side of the tray.

s1 Open the lower storage bin. Plug the por-table device charger into the power outletand into the portable device.

s2 Open the storage tray.

s3 Close the lower storage bin, using care notto pinch the cord.

s4 With the access hole covers sA removed,adjust the divider and insert the portabledevice upright, allowing the portable deviceconnector to pass through the hole in thestorage tray.

To prevent damage to the portable devicecord, do not route the cord through the holein the storage tray or attempt to close thestorage tray with the portable devicecharger connected.

LIC0496 LIC0731 LIC0732



Lower storage binOpen the lower storage bin by pressing the but-ton down.

Push the lid up to close.

CENTER TRAY TABLE (if soequipped)To use the center tray table, raise it up until itlocks into the upright position.

To access the small storage compartment on thetop of the tray table, raise the lid.

WIC0840 LIC0894



To store the tray table, pull the lever locatedbeneath the tray table up sA and gently lower thetray table to its original position.

GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking s1 or unlocking s2 theglove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock orunlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

● The sunglasses holder should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

LIC0895 LIC0499 LIC0508



● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

MAP POCKETSFront door

LIC0519

Sliding doorLIC0520



SEATBACK POCKETSThe seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

GROCERY HOOKSThe grocery hooks allow for standard size plasticgrocery bags to hang side by side.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 18lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

CARGO NETThe net located on the back of the driver’s seatcan be used to hold small objects.

WARNING

● Do not place sharp objects in the net.Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury when thevehicle is moving or if the vehicle isinvolved in a collision.

● The cargo restrained in the net must notexceed 18 lb (8 kg) or the net may notstay secured.

LIC0503 LIC0504 WIC0878



OVERHEAD CONSOLE

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

Large storage binPush the button to open the storage bin. Use thenet to keep small items in place.


Small storage binPush the button to open the small storage bin.


CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

The cup holder should not be used whiledriving so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

LIC0513 LIC0512



FrontType A

To open the cup holders, push the button. The lidsprings open automatically. Push the lid to the fullopen position.

Fold up the second cup holder ring, if desired.

To close, pull the entire cup holder unit up to theoriginal position.

Type B

To use the cup holders, raise the center tray table.Refer to “Center tray table” earlier in this section.

Type AWIC0833

Type BLIC0896



2nd row 3rd rowSoft bottle holder

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

LIC0509 LIC0507Sliding door bottle holder

LIC0521



CARGO ORGANIZERTo access the cargo organizer:

1. Move both front seats as forward as pos-sible. Refer to 9Seats9 in the 9Safety – seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem9 section earlier in this manual.

2. Stow the center tray table (if so equipped).Refer to “Center tray table” earlier in thissection.

3. Lift up the floor carpeting and the removablefloor board sA .

3RD ROW ARMREST BINRaise the lid to open the 3rd row armrest bin.

WIC0893

LIC0506



CARGO AREA STORAGE BINTo open the cargo area storage bin, turn the knobcounterclockwise s1 . The lid can be removed.

To close, replace the lid and turn the knob clock-wise s2 .

GARMENT HOOKTo store garments, pull the garment hook down tothe use position.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 55lbs (25 kg) to the hook.

HEAD RESTRAINT STORAGEThe storage bag can be used to store up to threehead restraints or other items.

The bag can be retained on the universal fasten-ers located on the trim in the cargo area.

CAUTION

● The cargo contained in the storage bagmust not exceed 5 lbs (2.2 kg).

● Do not apply a total load of more than55 lbs (25 kg) to the universal fasteners.

LIC0514 WIC0831 LIC0522



ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 125 lb (56 kg). Becareful that your vehicle does not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or itsGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s doorpillar). For more information regarding GVWRand GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-secured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

WIC0903



POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents. 1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side automatic switch4. Right rear power vent window switch (if

so equipped)5. Left rear power vent window switch (if

so equipped)6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled. To opena window, push the switch and hold it down. Toclose a window, pull the switch and hold it up. Tostop the opening or closing function at any time,simply release the switch.

LIC0489

WINDOWS



Front passenger power window switchThe passenger window switch operates only thecorresponding passenger window. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver side window can be opened or closed.Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

LIC0490 LIC0410



POWER VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)Use the vent window switches on the driver’sside window controls to open and close thepower vent windows.

To open a power vent window, press the switchdown s1 .

To close the window, lift the switch up s2 .

The power vent windows operate when the igni-tion key is in the ON position, or for 45 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the OFF position.If the driver’s or passenger’s door is openedduring this 45 second period, power to the ventwindows is cancelled.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)To open a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you until it releases.

To lock the window in the open position, push thelatch handle rearward until it locks.

To close a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you and push the rear portion ofthe latch toward the rear of the vehicle until itlocks.

To close the SkyView roof sunshade, pull the tabto draw out the shade. Lock the shade in place bypositioning the rod on the holder.

To open the shade, lift the rod from the holder andease the shade back into its stored position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the SkyView roof sunshadestraight down. This can damage theshade.

LIC0523 LIC0524 LIC0525

SKYVIEW™ GLASS-PANELED ROOF(if so equipped)



AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position. The automatic sunroofis operational for about 45 seconds, even if theignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the sunroof, slide the switch to theOPEN position. When the sunroof is tilted up, itwill automatically tilt down and then open.

To close the sunroof, slide the switch to theCLOSE position.

The position of the sliding sunroof lid can bechosen by the position of the sliding switch.

To fully open or close the sunroof, move theswitch completely to the OPEN or CLOSE posi-tion.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to theUP position. When the roof is open, it will auto-matically close and then tilt up. To tilt the sunroofdown, push the tilt switch to the DOWN position.

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch repeatedly toward DOWN to fullyclose the lid.

2. Finally, push and hold the tilting switch formore than 2 seconds toward DOWN toreestablish the lid’s home position.

The sunroof should now operate normally.

Auto reverse function (when closing ortilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated whenthe sunroof is closed or tilted down by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the sunroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof willimmediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-ately tilt up.

LIC0473

SUNROOF (if so equipped)



If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens, then the sunroof will fully closegradually. In this case, make sure nothing iscaught in the sunroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof.

The lights on demand switch allows the driver toselect one of three lighting modes for the interiorlights and puddle lamps (if so equipped). Thelights on demand switch operates regardless ofignition switch position.

: The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) illuminate. The lights will turn off auto-matically after 30 minutes to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

OFF: The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) do not illuminate.

: The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) illuminate when a door is opened.

LIC0472

LIGHTS ON DEMAND SWITCH



If the lights on demand switch is in theposition, the lights will stay on for about 30 sec-onds when:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) will turn off while the 30 second timeris activated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

NOTE:

The foot well and door step lights illumi-nate when the driver and passenger doorsare open regardless of the lights on de-mand switch position. These lights will turnoff automatically after 30 minutes whiledoors are open to prevent the battery frombecoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

The rear seating positions have personal lightslocated on the headliner or on the overhead con-sole. There is also a light above the cargo area onthe overhead trim.

To operate a personal light located on the head-liner (Type A), push the light.

Type ALIC0492

PERSONAL LIGHTS



The personal lights on the overhead console(Type B) can be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn onthe light, press the button. Press the button againto turn off the light.

The cargo light on the overhead trim (Type C) hasa three-position switch. To operate, push thelight.

On: The light is illuminated

Normal: The light illuminates when any door isopened or unlocked by the keyfob. The light turnsoff after 30 seconds or when all doors are closed.

Off: The light does not illluminate, regardless ofdoor position or lock status.

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Type BLIC0493

Type CLIC0492 LIC0491

MAP LIGHTS



CONSOLE LIGHTThe console light s1 will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information refer to “Program-ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

LIC0832

HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light s1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLinkT button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLinkT button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLinkT to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

LIC0526 LIC0527



NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener program button,quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLinkT button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer tothe HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.



CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLinkT buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690



3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Nissan vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Operating the manual sliding door(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Using the main ON/OFF switch for thepower sliding door (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Operating the power sliding door(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Operating the manual lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Using the main ON/OFF switch for thepower lift gate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Operating the power lift gate(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Fuel filler cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Inside mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27


1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove boxlock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


CAUTION

● Always use the door handle to open orclose a sliding door. Do not attempt toopen or close the doors by merely plac-ing your hand on the door edge or doorslide roller, as this may cause injury.

● Always be sure that hands and feet areclear of the door frame to avoid injurywhile closing a sliding door.

● When opening a sliding door on a slope,ensure that it is fully open and that itdoes not close by itself.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

Driver’s sideLPD0181

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey to the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

Inside lock for front doorsLPD0208

Inside lock for sliding doorsLPD0224



LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver or front passenger side), to thelock position s1 . When locking the door this way,be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver or front passenger side)to the unlock position s2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.This helps to prevent the keys from being acci-dently locked inside the vehicle.

OPERATING THE MANUAL SLIDINGDOOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have theirhands, etc. inside the vehicle before clos-ing the sliding doors.

The manual sliding door can be opened from theinside or the outside.

To open a sliding door from the inside, push thebutton s1 and pull the handle toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

Door lock switchLPD0183 LPD0233



To open a sliding door from the outside, pull outthe outside handle.

The driver side sliding door cannot be openedfully when the fuel-filler door is open.

USING THE MAIN ON/OFF SWITCHFOR THE POWER SLIDING DOOR(if so equipped)

The main ON/OFF switch is located in the over-head console.

Push the switch ON to enable the door pillarswitches and the power assist feature. An indica-tor light will illuminate when the switch is in theON position.

Push the switch OFF to disable the door pillarswitches and the power assist feature. An indica-tor light will illuminate when the switch is in theOFF position.

When the switch is in the OFF position, thesliding door can still be opened with the keyfob oroverhead console switch. The sliding door canalso be opened manually with the inside or out-side handle.

NOTE:

If the child safety lock is in the lock posi-tion, the door pillar switch will not operatethe sliding door regardless of the mainON/OFF switch position.

LPD0222



OPERATING THE POWER SLIDINGDOOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle be-fore closing the sliding doors.


NOTE:

To open, close or reverse a power slidingdoor, the ignition switch must be OFF, or, ifthe ignition switch is ON, the shift selectorlever must be in P (Park). Also, the powersliding doors will not operate if batteryvoltage is low.

Power Assist:If the main on/off switch is ON and a sliding dooris unlocked and manually moved toward the openor close position using the inside or outside

handle, the power assist feature will be activatedand the door will complete its motion automati-cally.

Power Open:The door automatically moves from the fullyclosed position to the fully open position in ap-proximately 3 – 6 seconds. The power openfeature can be activated by the switches on thekeyfob, the overhead console and the door pillar.

● A sliding door can be opened by the over-head console switch and the keyfob even ifthe vehicle is locked. The door will individu-ally unlock and open. When the sliding dooris closed, it will remain unlocked. The vehiclemust be re-locked to lock the door.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the door opens.

● The switch on the door pillar can only beused to open the door if the main ON/OFFswitch is ON, the door is unlocked and thechild lockout switch is not set.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selectorlever is moved out of P (Park) during a poweropen operation.

The driver’s side power sliding door cannot bepower opened when the fuel lid door is open. A

Door pillar switchLPD0225

Overhead console switchLPD0226



warning chime will sound if an open operation isattempted. The door can be opened manuallypart way.

Power Close:The door automatically moves from the fully openposition to the secondary position. When thesliding door reaches the secondary position, thecinching motor engages and pulls the door to itsprimary latch position. Power close takes ap-proximately 4 – 7 seconds. The power closefeature can be activated by the switches on thekeyfob, the overhead console and the door pillar.

● If the inside or outside handle is activatedwhile the cinching motor is engaged, thecinching motor will disengage and releasethe latch.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the door closes.

● The switch on the door pillar can only beused to close the door if the main ON/OFFswitch is ON.

Reverse:The door will reverse direction immediately dur-ing power open or power close if the keyfob,overhead console or door pillar switch ispressed. A chime will sound to announce thereversal.

Auto Reverse:If an obstacle is detected during power open orpower close, a warning chime will sound and thedoor will reverse direction and return to the fullopen or full close position. If a second obstacle isdetected, the door motion will stop and the clutchmode will be engaged.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the door.

Clutch Mode:To help prevent unexpected slams due to gravity,the clutch mode is engaged intermittently forapproximately 5 – 8 seconds when power openor close is interrupted due to multiple obstacles,low battery voltage or the main ON/OFF switchturned to OFF. The door must then be opened orclosed manually.

Restarting the power sliding door

Some power sliding door functions will becomedisabled after the battery terminal is discon-nected and/or the electrical supply is interrupted.

The following procedure must be used to restarteach power sliding door so that all functions areenabled.

1. Turn the main on/off switch to OFF.

2. Manually open the power sliding door to itsfully open position.

3. Turn the main on/off switch to ON.

4. Press and hold the power sliding doorswitch on the overhead console until thedoor closes.

5. Release the switch.

6. Press and hold the power sliding doorswitch on the overhead console until thedoor opens as far as it can.


8. Press and hold the power sliding doorswitch on the overhead console until thedoor closes.


The power sliding door should now work properly.

NOTE:

The restarting procedure must be com-pleted for both the left-hand and right-hand power sliding doors (if so equipped).



CHILD SAFETY SLIDING DOORLOCK

The child safety lock helps prevent the slidingdoor from being opened accidentally, especiallywhen small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the sliding doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside,by the overhead console switch or usingthe keyfob.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights and puddle lamps (if so equipped),and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfobfrom outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beepand unlock driver’s door 1st, can be adjusted.Refer to “Personalized settings menu” (vehicleswith monochrome screen) or “Vehicle electronicsystems” (vehicles with color screen) in the “Dis-play screen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems” section later in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends upon the conditions aroundthe vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

LPD0231

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM



CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard warning lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you push thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Person-alized settings menu” (vehicles with monochromescreen) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicleswith color screen) in the “Display screen, heater,air conditioner and audio systems”section later inthis manual.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and lamp flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screenwill not show the current mode and cannotbe used to change the mode. Use the key-fob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display screen control.

LPD0209



Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed with the ignition key inany position except the ON position.

● The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) turn on and the light timer acti-vates for 30 seconds when the lights ondemand switch is in the position withthe ignition key in any position except theON position.

Push the button on the keyfob again within5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed.

The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) can be turned off without waiting 30seconds by inserting the key into the ignition andturning to the ON or START position, locking thedoors with the keyfob or pushing the interior lightswitch to the OFF position.

Auto relockWhen the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Opening windowsThe keyfob allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simulta-neously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memoryIf the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic driver positioner” later in thissection.

LPD0210



Operating the power sliding door (if soequipped)Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about0.5 second to open or close the power slidingdoor.

The door will reverse direction immediately dur-ing power open or power close if the keyfobbutton is pressed. A chime will sound to an-nounce the reversal.

For more information, see “Operating the powersliding door” earlier in this section.

Operating the power lift gate (if soequipped)Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about0.5 second to open or close the lift gate. Thehazard warning lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power open or power close se-quence has started.

The lift gate will reverse direction immediatelyduring power open or power close if the keyfobbutton is pressed. A chime will sound to an-nounce the reversal.

For more information, see “Lift gate” later in thissection.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

LPD0212 LPD0213 LPD0211



Using the interior lightsPush the button on the keyfob once to turnon the interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped).

For additional information, refer to “Lights ondemand switch” in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier in this manual.

s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

s2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

s3 Insert the support rod into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

LPD0215

HOOD



WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFT GATE

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have theirhands, etc., inside the vehicle before clos-ing the lift gate.

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-neously.

To open the lift gate, depress the opener handleand lift up.

To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-curely.

USING THE MAIN ON/OFF SWITCHFOR THE POWER LIFT GATE (if soequipped)

The main ON/OFF switch is located in the over-head console.

Push the switch ON to enable the rear pillarswitch. An indicator light will illuminate when theswitch is in the ON position.

Push the switch OFF to disable the rear pillarswitch. An indicator light will illuminate when theswitch is in the OFF position. Pushing the switch

LPD0221 LPD0222

LIFT GATE



OFF while the lift gate is opening or closing willcancel the operation and the lift gate will go tomanual mode.

When the switch is in the OFF position, the liftgate can still be opened with the keyfob or over-head console switch. The lift gate can also beopened manually with the outside handle if the liftgate is unlocked.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the lift gate.


NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, the shift selector lever must be in P(Park). Also, the power lift gate will notoperate if battery voltage is low.

Power Open:The power lift gate automatically moves from thefully closed position to the fully open position inapproximately 5 – 8 seconds. The power openfeature can be activated by the switch on thekeyfob and the overhead console and by theoutside opener handle. The hazard lights flash

Rear pillar switchLPD0229

Overhead console switchLPD0223



and a chime sounds to indicate the power opensequence has been started.

● The lift gate can be opened by the overheadconsole switch and the keyfob even if thevehicle is locked. The lift gate will individuallyunlock and open. Once the lift gate isclosed, its lock will align to the vehicle’s lockor unlock status.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the lift gate opens.

● The lift gate must be unlocked to open it withthe outside opener handle.

● The switch on the rear pillar cannot be usedto open the lift gate.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selectorlever is moved out of P (Park) during a poweropen operation.

Power Close:The power lift gate automatically moves from thefully open position to the secondary position.When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi-tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power closetakes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The powerclose feature can be activated by the switch onthe keyfob, the overhead console and the rear

pillar. The hazard lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power close sequence has beenstarted.

● If the outside opener handle is activatedwhile the cinching motor is engaged, thecinching motor will disengage and releasethe latch.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the lift gate closes.

● The switch on the rear pillar can only be usedto close the lift gate if the main ON/OFFswitch is ON.

Reverse:The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi-ately during power open or power close if thekeyfob, overhead console or rear pillar switch ispressed. A chime will sound to announce thereversal.

Auto Reverse:If an obstacle is detected during power open orpower close, a warning chime will sound and thelift gate will reverse direction and return to the fullopen or full close position. If a second obstacle isdetected, the lift gate motion will stop and thedrive motor will disengage. The lift gate will entermanual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch stripduring power close, the lift gate will reverse di-rection and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the lift gate.

Manual Mode:If power operation is not available, the lift gatemay be operated manually. Power operation maynot be available if the main ON/OFF switch is inthe OFF position, if multiple obstacles have beendetected in a single power cycle, or if batteryvoltage is low.



Safe Mode:If the lift gate gas stays s1 lose pressure, thepower lift gate safe mode is activated. When thesafe mode is activated, the lift gate slowly closes.A continuous warning chime sounds until the liftgate is in the fully down position. Then the lift gatewill be pulled to the closed and latched positionby a motor.

The power lift gate cannot be opened using theswitches at any time in the safe mode.

The auto reverse function remains active whilethe lift gate is closing in the safe mode.

Do not operate the lift gate again until it ischecked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● If the power lift gate does not stay openor if the lift gate unexpectedly closes atany time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the lift gate gas stays.Have the lift gate inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power lift gate if oneor both of the lift gate gas stays areremoved. Damage to the lift gate orpower lift gate mechanisms may occur.

LIFT GATE RELEASE

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

CAUTION

● If the power lift gate does not stay openor if the lift gate unexpectedly closes atany time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the lift gate gas stays.Have the lift gate inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power lift gate if oneor both of the lift gate gas stays areremoved. Damage to the lift gate orpower lift gate mechanisms may occur.

LPD0238



Manual lift gate (if so equipped)If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked withthe door lock switch or the keyfob due to adischarged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever down to lock or up to unlock.

Power lift gate (if so equipped)If the lift gate cannot be opened with the doorlock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery,follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever up to open the lift gate.

OPENER OPERATIONThe fuel-filler door release is located on the driv-er’s door. To open the fuel-filler door, push therelease. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se-curely.

Manual releaseLPD0230

Power releaseLPD0236 LPD0220

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

LPD0232



● Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.

TILT OPERATIONPull the lock lever forward and adjust the steeringwheel up or down to the desired position.

Push the lock lever back to lock the steeringwheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position forward s1or backward s2 . Pedal adjustment can only beperformed when:

● Ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position

● Ignition switch is ON and the selector leveris in the P (Park) position

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

LPD0216 WPD0316

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if soequipped)



CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

s1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

s2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

s3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out asneeded.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward.

LPD0217

SUN VISORS



VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. The vanitymirror will illuminate when the mirror cover isopen.

INSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally changes reflection according to the intensityof the headlights of the vehicle following you.

The indicator light s1 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe O button.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe | button.

LPD0218 WPD0126 WPD0329

MIRRORS



For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Move the small switch s1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch s2 .

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

LPD0237



Foldable outside mirrors

Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if soequipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,turn the outside mirror control switch to the left orright position. Only one mirror can be selected ata time.

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). Theselected mirror will turn downward.

The selected mirror surface will return to its origi-nal position when any of the following have oc-curred:

● The shift selector lever is moved to any po-sition other than R (Reverse).

● The outside mirror control switch is set to theneutral position.

● The ignition switch is turned OFF.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in theneutral position, neither mirror will turndownward when the shift selector lever ismoved to R (Reverse).

For more information regarding this feature andhow to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-downadjustment in the automatic drive positionermemory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” laterin this section.

The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

MPA0008

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)



MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-ver to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section and “Pedal position adjust-ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in thissection.

During this step, do not turn the ignition toany position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for atleast 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memorypositionEach keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,press the button on the keyfob. The driv-er’s seat and outside mirrors will move to thememorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob must be re-linked.

LPD0219



Procedure for storing the outsidemirror positions for best visibility whenbacking up

An outside mirror position for backing up can bestored for each memory switch (1 and 2).

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the en-gine.)

3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for atleast 1 second to operate the automaticdrive positioner.

4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L(left).

5. Depress the brake pedal.

6. Move the automatic transmission shift leverto R (Reverse).

7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po-sition for backing up by operating the out-side mirror control switch.

8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected instep 3 fully for at least 1 second.

● The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.

After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected mirror position is stored in the se-lected memory (1 or 2).

9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R(right). Repeat the above procedure to ad-just the right mirror position and store in theselected memory.

● When the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors are not inthe memorized position, the outside mirrorwill move with the initial tilt-down angle.

Confirming memory storage● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET switch.

If the main memory has not been stored, theindicator light will come on for approximately0.5 seconds. When the memory has storedthe position, the indicator light will stay on forapproximately 5 seconds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory will be canceled. Insuch a case, reset the desired positionsusing the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

2. Reset the desired position using the previ-ous procedure.

Selecting the memorized position

Set the automatic transmission selector lever tothe P (Park) position, then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fullyfor at least 1 second, or

● Turn the ignition switch to the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully forat least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,and outside mirrors will move to the memorizedposition with the indicator light blinking, and thenthe light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the automatictransmission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get into and outof the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened.

● When the driver’s door is opened with thekey turned to LOCK.



● When the key is turned from ACC to LOCKwith the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to previous position:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is closed.

● When the driver’s door is closed with the keyturned to LOCK.

● When the key is turned from ACC to ONwhile the automatic transmission selectorlever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. See “Personalized settings menu” (ve-hicles with monochrome screen) or “Vehicleelectronic systems” (vehicles with color screen)in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner andaudio systems” section of this manual.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is notpushed and held for at least 1 second.

● When the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the automatic transmission selectorlever is moved from P (Park) to any otherposition.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. See “Personalized set-tings menu” (vehicles with monochrome screen)or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles withcolor screen) in the “Display screen, heater, airconditioner and audio systems” section of thismanual.



4 Display screen, heater, air conditionerand audio systems

Control panel buttons - with monochrome screen . . . . . 4-2Names of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use JOYSTICK and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . 4-3How to use “BACK” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use “FUEL ECON” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use “E/M” (English/Metric) button . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Control panel buttons — color screen withoutnavigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . . 4-8How to use “BACK” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Setting the display (Audio or HVAC display): . . . . . 4-12

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Control panel buttons — color screen withnavigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . 4-16How to use “BACK” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Setting the display (Audio or HVAC display): . . . . . 4-20

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Rear control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39


Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-41Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (Type A)/CD changer (Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54

DVD entertainment system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 4-54Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-55Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64


WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-trol panel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on thescreen. By selecting this key you can proceed tothe next function.

WHA0588

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS - WITHMONOCHROME SCREEN

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems


NAMES OF COMPONENTS1. brightness control button (P. 4-7)

2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-16)

3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)

4. SETTING button (P. 4-6)

5. (maintenance) button (P. 4-5)

6. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-3)

7. E/M (English/Metric) button (P. 4-4)

8. FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4)

9. TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3)

10. Clock adjust button (hours/minutes) (P. 4-4)

To turn off the screen, push the button formore than approximately 1.5 seconds. Thescreen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFFYES or NO”.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTONChoose an item on the display using the joystick.Push the “ENTER” button only when the use of itis instructed on the display.

HOW TO USE “BACK” BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the“BACK” button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

If you press the“BACK” button after the setup iscompleted, the setup will start over.

HOW TO USE “TRIP” BUTTONWhen the “TRIP” button is pushed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) → TRIP 2 (TIME, DIST,AVG) → OFF

TRIP 1 and TRIP 2 record journey time (TIME —max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer (DIST— mile or km) and average speed (AVG — MPHor km/h).

To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the “TRIP”button or the “TRIP RESET” button for morethan approximately 1.5 seconds.

LHA0252

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3


HOW TO USE “FUEL ECON”BUTTON

The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100km) and the distance to empty (dte — mi or km)will appear on the screen when the “FUELECON” button is pushed.

Average fuel consumption (MPG orL/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the “TRIP RE-SET” or “FUEL ECON” button for more thanapproximately 1.5 seconds.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. Forapproximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles(500 m) after a reset or connecting the batterycables, the display will show (----).

Distance to empty (dte — mile or km)The distance to empty (dte) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-ing calculated based on the amount of fuel in thefuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

When the fuel level is low, the dte display willchange to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is OFF is small, the display just beforethe ignition switch is turned OFF may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

CLOCKThe digital clock displays time when the ignitionkey is in ACC or ON.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

Adjusting the timeTo adjust the time, push the “H” or “M” buttonfor more than approximately 1.5 seconds. Thetime indicator will flash.

Touch the “H” button to adjust the hour.

Touch the “M” button to adjust the minute.

To finish the adjusting, press the “BACK” buttonor the screen will return to normal after 10 sec-onds.

HOW TO USE “E/M” (English/Metric)BUTTONYou can change the unit as follows using the“E/M” button.

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

LHA0253



HOW TO USE (maintenance)BUTTON

Pushing the button will change the main-tenance menu as follows:

ENGINE OIL → TIRE ROTATION→ TIRE PRES-SURE

To reset the driving distance, push thebutton or “TRIP RESET” button for more thanapproximately 1.5 seconds.

To set the distance, push the joystick to left orright.

To automatically display the Maintenance menu(“ENGINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) when thevehicle is driven the set distance, turn ON theservice alert key.

To turn the service alert key ON, refer to “How touse the setting button” in this section”.

When the vehicle is driven the set distance, theMAINTENANCE screen will be automatically dis-played and the Maintenance menu (“ENGINEOIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will blink.

To return to the previous display after the Main-tenance Notice message is displayed, push theBACK button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “ or “TRIP RESET” button is pushed.

● “Service alert key” is set OFF.

● the maintenance interval is set again.

Tire pressure information

Pressure indication in **psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of the tire pressure figures displayedon the screen does not correspond with theactual order of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature.

LHA0250 LHA0383



In case of low tire pressure, a message (FLATTIRE or CHECK ALL TIRE) is displayed on thescreen:

FLAT TIRE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated and the low tire pressure warningsystem will not function. Contact yourNISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tirereplacement and/or system resetting.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”BUTTON

Pushing the “SETTING” button will change thesettings menu as follows:

DISPLAY ON/OFF

LANGUAGE

BEEP SET

SERVICE ALERT

PERSONALIZED SETTINGS MENU

Display ON/OFF

To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the“Display ON/OFF” using the joystick.

The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAYOFF YES or NO”.

If YES key is selected using the joystick, thescreen will turn off after a 2 beep sound andapproximately 1 second.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING” , tripcontrol, air conditioner (except rear window de-fogger button) or audio button.

Language

The language can be changed to “English” or“Français” using the joystick.

Beep set

If the beep set “OFF” key is selected using thejoystick, the beep sound will not operate (exceptsome caution beep sounds).

Service alert

If the service alert “ON” key is selected, theinformation will be displayed when the engine oiland the tire rotation periods reach the presetdriving distance.

Personalized settings menu

You can set the following electronic systemsoperating conditions using the joystick.

Slide back DR (driver’s) seat on exit:

The driver’s seat automatically moves back andreturns to the original position for exceptionalease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock door logic:

This option allows you to select which doors willunlock first during an unlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Horn chirp with remote:

This option allows you to select the horn chirpmode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCKbutton on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the displayscreen will not show the current mode. Usethe keyfob to return to the previous modeand re-enable the display screen control.

Lamps flash with remote:

This option allows you to select the hazard indi-cator flash mode that occurs when the LOCK orUNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.



NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto relock time:

This option allows you to set the length of timebefore the doors lock with the auto re-lock func-tion.

Auto headlamp sensitivity:

This option allows you to set the sensitivity of theautolights.

Auto headlamp off delay:

This option allows you to select the length of timebefore the autolights turn off.

Speed sensing wiper interval:

This option allows you to turn on or turn off thedriving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion.

Confirm reset settings:

This option allows you to reset all options to theirdefault settings.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pushthe button. Pushing the button again willchange the display to DAY or NIGHT display.Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystickright or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the“BACK” button is pushed, the display will returnto the previous display.

WARNING









Reference symbols:



NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS1. brightness control button (P. 4-25)




5. (maintenance) button (P. 4-5)


7. E/M (English/Metric) button (P. 4-4)

8. FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4)

9. TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3)

10. Clock adjust button (hours/minutes) (P. 4-4)

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTONChoose an item on the display using the joystickand push the “ENTER” button for operation.




● Finish setup.

If you press this button after the setup is com-pleted, the setup will start over, and the displaywill return to the climate control or audio modeand Navigation screen.

Display screen without navigationLHA0589

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITHOUTNAVIGATION SYSTEM



HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTONWhen the “TRIP” button is pushed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, AverageSpeed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (AverageFuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres-sure — if so equipped) → OFF.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy itemsTo reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUELECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using thejoystick and push the “ENTER” button or pushthe “TRIP” button for more than approximately1.5 seconds.

Maintenance itemsYou can set the engine oil and the tire rotationinterval.

To display the setting of the maintenance interval,select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

LHA0552 LHA0553 LHA0554



To set the maintenance interval, select the“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy-stick and push the joystick to right or left.

To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re-set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-TER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATIONautomatically when set trip distance is reached,select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“EN-GINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will be auto-matically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● the vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

● the ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driving.

To return to the previous display after the “MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

LHA0555 LHA0556 LHA0483




● “RESET” is selected.

● “Display Maintenance and Notification” isset OFF.



To view “TIRE PRESSURE” information, push the“TRIP” button repeatedly until the “MAINTE-NANCE” screen is displayed. Select “TIREPRESSURE” using the joystick and push the“ENTER” button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.


In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:


WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated and the low tire pressure warningsystem will not function. Contact yourNISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tirereplacement and/or system resetting.LHA0557



HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”BUTTONTo adjust the various settings within the displayscreen press the“SETTING” button.

After pressing the SETTING button a menu willbe shown on the display screen which will allowyou to program several functions such as thedisplay screen appearance, programmable fea-tures for your vehicles electronics system andother system settings such as your clock. Tomake a selection from this mode use the joystickand press the “ENTER” button.

SETTING THE DISPLAY (Audio orHVAC display):

The audio or HVAC reading can be displayed atthe bottom of the screen. Choose the “Audio” or“HVAC” (Heater and air conditioner) key to bedisplayed at the bottom, by using the joystick andpressing the ENTER button to select or deselectthe key. The setting condition will normally appearon the screen. To return to the setting screen,push the “SETTING” button or “BACK” button.

Display settingsThe DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af-ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but-ton.

Brightness/Contrast:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of thescreen, select the “Brightness/contrast” keyand push the “ENTER” button. You can then usethe joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker orBrighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher.

Display Off:

To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key. The indicator of the “DisplayOff” will turn to amber. When any mode button ispushed with the screen off, the screen turns on

for further operation. The screen will turn offautomatically 5 seconds after the operation isfinished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC(Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VE-HICLE INFO modes.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key, then set the screen to on bypushing the “ENTER” button.

LHA0599



Vehicle electronic systems

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screenwill appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

To set the various electronic systems operatingconditions, select the applicable item using thejoystick, and push the “ENTER” button. Theindicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Remote unlock driver’s door first:



Keyless remote response — horn:

This key allows you to change the horn chirpmode that occurs when pressing the LOCK orUNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:


Keyless remote response — lights:

This key allows you to change the hazard indica-tor flash mode that occurs when pressing theLOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:


Auto re-lock time:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore doors auto re-lock.

LHA0601 LHA0560



Speed dependent wiper:

This key allows you to turn on or turn off thedriving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on usingthe “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the defaultsettings.

System settingsLanguage/Unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

Language: English or French


You can select the language and unit using thejoystick and “ENTER” button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and movethe joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

After completion of the setting, press the“BACK” button.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pushed.

LHA0561 LHA0600



BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pushthe button. Pushing the button again willchange the display to DAY or NIGHT display.Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystickright or left.


WARNING









Reference symbols:



NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS1. brightness control button (P. 4-25)





6. DEST button*

7. MAP button*

8. ROUTE button*

9. GUIDE VOICE button*

10. Zoom in button*

11. Zoom out button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND“ENTER” BUTTONChoose an item on the display using the joystickand push the “ENTER” button for operation.




● Finish setup.

If you press this button after the setup is com-pleted, the setup will start over, and the displaywill return to the climate control or audio modeand Navigation screen.

Display screen with navigationLHA0551

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM



SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, theSYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the “IAGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) keythen push the “ENTER” button.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button, theNavigation system will not proceed to the nextstep display.

If you do not touch the button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING orSTART-UP screen, the screen will change toTRIP screen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTONWhen the “TRIP” button is pushed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, AverageSpeed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (AverageFuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres-sure — if so equipped) → OFF.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy itemsTo reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUELECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using thejoystick and push the “ENTER” button or pushthe “TRIP” button for more than approximately1.5 seconds.

LHA0552 LHA0553



Maintenance itemsYou can set the engine oil and the tire rotationinterval.

To display the setting of the maintenance interval,select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

To set the maintenance interval, select the“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy-stick and push the joystick to right or left.

To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re-set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-TER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATIONautomatically when set trip distance is reached,select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.

LHA0554 LHA0555 LHA0556



The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“EN-GINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will be auto-matically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● the vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

● the ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driving.

To return to the previous display after the “MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.


● “RESET” is selected.

● “Display Maintenance and Notification” isset OFF.



To view “TIRE PRESSURE” information, push the“TRIP” button repeatedly until the “MAINTE-NANCE” screen is displayed. Select “TIREPRESSURE” using the joystick and push the“ENTER” button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

LHA0483 LHA0557




In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:


WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated and the low tire pressure warningsystem will not function. Contact yourNISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tirereplacement and/or system resetting.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”BUTTONTo adjust the various settings within the displayscreen press the“SETTING” button.

After pressing the SETTING button a menu willbe shown on the display screen which will allowyou to program several functions such as thedisplay screen appearance, programmable fea-tures for your vehicles electronics system andother system settings such as your clock. Tomake a selection from this mode use the joystickand press the “ENTER” button.

SETTING THE DISPLAY (Audio orHVAC display):The audio or HVAC reading can be displayed atthe bottom of the screen. Choose the “Audio” or“HVAC” (Heater and air conditioner) key to bedisplayed at the bottom, by using the joystick andpressing the ENTER button to select or deselectthe key. The setting condition will normally appearon the screen. To return to the setting screen,push the “SETTING” button or “BACK” button.

Display settingsThe DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af-ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but-ton.

Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of thescreen, select the “Brightness/contrast” keyand push the “ENTER” button. You can then usethe joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker orBrighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher. Forinformation on Map Background, please refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

LHA0558



Display Off:

To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key. The indicator of the “DisplayOff” will turn to amber. When any mode button ispushed with the screen off, the screen turns onfor further operation. The screen will turn offautomatically 5 seconds after the operation isfinished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC(Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VE-HICLE INFO modes.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-play Off” key, then set the screen to on bypushing the “ENTER” button.

Setting Audio or HVAC display:

Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and airconditioner) key to be displayed at the bottom, byusing the joystick. The audio or HVAC settingcondition will normally appear on the screen. Toreturn to the setting screen, push the “SET-TING” button or “BACK” button.

Vehicle electronic systems

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screenwill appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

To set the various electronic systems operatingconditions, select the applicable item using thejoystick, and push the “ENTER” button. Theindicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle:

With this option ON, the driver’s seat automati-cally moves back and returns to the original po-sition for ease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first:



Keyless remote response — horn:

This key allows you to change the horn chirpmode that occurs when pressing the LOCK orUNLOCK button on the keyfob.

LHA0559 LHA0564



NOTE:


Keyless remote response — lights:

This key allows you to change the hazard indica-tor flash mode that occurs when pressing theLOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

NOTE:


Auto re-lock time:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore doors auto re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights:

This key allows you to set the sensitivity of theautomatic headlights:

● Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

● Higher- more sensitive, automatic head-lights will come on quicker when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay:

This key allows you to set the length of timebefore the automatic headlights turn off afterexiting the vehicle.

Speed dependent wiper:

This key allows you to turn on or turn off thedriving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on usingthe “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the defaultsettings.LHA0565



System settingsLanguage/Unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and push-ing the “ENTER” button.

Language: English or French


You can select the language and unit using thejoystick and “ENTER” button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and movethe joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjustthe clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

LHA0561 LHA0562 LHA0566



Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones dependingon the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screenwill appear.

LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563



The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pushed.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pushthe button. Pushing the button again willchange the display to DAY or NIGHT display.Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystickright or left.


When the selector lever is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display showsview to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The rear view camera is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the rear view monitordiffer from actual distance because awide-angle lens is used. Objects in therear view monitor will appear visuallyopposite than when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

● Make sure that the lift gate is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rear viewcamera. The rear view camera is in-stalled beside the license plate light.

● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to thebumper line sA are displayed on the monitor.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)



They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper linesA inthe illustration.

s1 1.5 feet (0.5 m) red

s2 3 feet (1 m) yellow

s3 7 feet (2 m) green

s4 10 feet (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the quality of the screen, refer to HOWTO USE THE “SETTING” BUTTON in this sec-tion.

● When it is difficult to see in the rearwarddirection due to shady conditions, press the“ENTER” button to make objects in themonitor brighter.

● To change the brightness, press the “EN-TER” button again, turn the key switch OFFor shift to reverse and wait for 10 seconds.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the selector lever is shifted to R, themonitor screen automatically changes to therear view monitor mode. However, the radiocan be heard.

● It may take some time until the rear viewmonitor is displayed after the selector leverhas been shifted to R. Objects may be dis-torted momentarily until the rear view moni-tor screen is displayed completely. Whenthe selector lever is returned to a positionother than R, it may take some time until thescreen changes. Objects on the screen maybe distorted until they are completely dis-played.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the rear view moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pushing the “ENTER” button may notchange the brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the rear view monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolora-tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA0437



● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-senger sides1 , center s2 , and rear passengers3 ventilators by moving the ventilator slideand/or ventilator assemblies.

LHA0328

VENTILATORS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

1. Fan speed control dial2. Air recirculation button3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Air flow control dial6. Rear window defroster switch7. Rear fan speed dial8. Rear temperature dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dialThe air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling (airconditioning).

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

WHA0501

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)



— Air flows from center and sideventilators and the front and rearfloor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the front andrear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand the front and rear flooroutlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

The air flow control dial also has intermediatepositions which allow the air flow to be distrib-uted between 2 of the icon positions on the airflow control dial.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position:Push the button to recirculate air insidethe vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

OFF position:Push the button again to turn air recircula-tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment and distributed through the se-lected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. A/C will appear on thedisplay when the air conditioner is operating. Toturn off the air conditioner, push the buttonagain, the display will show A/C OFF.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switchFor more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF position fornormal heating ( shown on display).

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button to the OFF position( shown on display).


3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.



Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.


2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.


● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the highestsetting and the temperature control lever tothe full HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,A/C will not appear on the display) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,A/C will not appear on the display) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.



Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.



4. Push the button. A/C will appear onthe display.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position ( shown on display).Be sure to return the to the OFF po-sition for normal cooling ( shown ondisplay). You may also select MAX A/C forquick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button. The display showsA/C.


Operating tips● Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section.The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.



WHA0502 WHA0503



WHA0504 WHA0505



WHA0506



WHA0507



WHA0508



1. Driver temperature control dial2. Front window defroster button3. Fan speed control and system OFF dial4. AUTO button5. Passenger temperature control dial6. A/C ON/OFF button7. Rear control and fan speed dial8. Rear window defroster button9. MODE button10. Air recirculation button11. Rear temperature control dial

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

● Positioning of the heater and/or airconditioner controls should not bedone while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressAUTO a second time to activate dual climatecontrol functions. Turn the passenger’s sidetemperature control dial to the left or right toset the desired passenger’s temperature.

LHA0491

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster control button toturn the system on. The display will show thedefrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, turn the manual fan control dial tothe maximum position .

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return to theauto mode.

● When the DEF control is activated,the air conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperatures above36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more thanone minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan control isturned OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even ifthe air flow MODE control button is used toselect a position other than the posi-

tion. This dehumidifies the air which helpsdefog the windshield. The air recirculationmode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed controlTurn the fan control dial left or right tomanually control the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculationThe mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to prevent fogging.

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, orfloor/defrost mode.

Air flow controlPushing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet to:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.To turn system offTurn and hold the fan speed control dial all theway to the left ( 0 ) until the system turns off.



1. Rear fan speed control dial.

2. Rear temperature control dial.

REAR CONTROL DIALYou can adjust the climate control system for rearseat passengers using the dials on the maincontrol panel. Front passengers can control therear functions by placing the controls on anysetting other than the “R”.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor s1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

WHA0509 LIC0515



To operate the rear air conditioner, the enginemust be running.

The rear seat air conditioner can be turned onand off from the front controls. If the rear seat fancontrol dial is set to (0), the air conditioner isturned off. If it is set to any of the fan speedpositions, air is discharged from the rear vents atthe corresponding speed. When the rear seat fancontrol dial is set to (R), the rear seat passengerscontrol their own fan speed.

1. Rear fan speed control dial.2. Rear temperature control dial.CONTROLS

Fan control dialThe fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on andoff, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows rear passen-gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

LHA0490

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob toturn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, the key should be turned tothe ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

AUDIO SYSTEM



the vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONSCompact disc (CD) player

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or extremely low.Decrease or increase the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work properly:● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunction:● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter● CDs that are not round● CDs with a paper label● CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

LHA0099



1. SEEK/TRACK change button2. TUNE/REW/FF button3. DISP button4. PROG/RPT button5. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

6. PRESET A-B-C select button7. Station select buttons (1 - 6)8. CD play button9. FM-AM band select button10. SAT (satellite) radio select button*

11. REAR ON·OFF button12. Rear speaker control button13. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

[BASS, TREBLE, FADE BALANCE andSSV (if so equipped)]

14. CD insert slot15. CD eject button

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna areinstalled, and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satel-lite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

Type ALHA0591



1. SEEK/TRACK change button2. TUNE/REW/FF button3. DISP button4. PROG/RPT button5. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

6. PRESET A-B-C select button7. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)8. CD play button9. FM-AM band select button10. SAT (satellite) radio select button*

11. REAR ON·OFF button12. Rear speaker control button13. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

[BASS, TREBLE, FADE BALANCE andSSV (if so equipped)]

14. CD load button15. CD insert slot16. CD eject button

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna areinstalled, and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satel-lite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Type A)/CD CHANGER (Type B)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

Type BLHA0590



Audio main operation

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpush the ON·OFF/Volume control knob while thesystem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF/Volumecontrol knob.

Turn the ON·OFF/Volume control knob to adjustthe volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with speed sensi-tive control volume (SSV) for audio. The audiovolume changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-ANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE →SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO knob until the desired mode appearsin the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. You can alsouse the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balancemodes. Fader adjusts the sound level between

the front and rear speakers and Balance adjuststhe sound between the right and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text aboutCD or SAT information in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Disc title ←→ Track title.

To change the default display mode push thetune knob to display mode and rotate the knob toselect the following display mode: Disc title ←→Track title ←→ Track number.

Once the display mode is selected press the tuneknob to store your selection. If the tuning knob isnot pressed after 8 seconds the display will re-fresh with the last selected display mode setting.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disc.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcasted information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode push thetune knob to display mode and rotate the knob toselect the following display modes: Channelnumber ←→ Channel name ←→ Name ←→Title. Once the display mode is selected pressthe tune knob again to store the setting. If thetuning knob is not pressed after 8 seconds thedisplay will refresh with the last selected displaymode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.



● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pushing the FM-AM or SAT radio select buttonwill change the band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT (Satellite- if so equipped)

When FM-AM or SAT radio select button ispushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON, the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe ON·OFF/Volume control knob is depressedto ON.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM-AM orSAT radio select button is pushed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

WARNING

The radio should not be tuned while driv-ing so full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button( or ) or turn the tuning knob to rightor left.

To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK/TRACK button ( or )for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the or button for more than1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting stationfor 5 seconds. Pushing the button again duringthis 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that station. Ifthe or button is not pushed within 5seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SATradio to the A, B and C preset button in anycombination of AM, FM or SAT* stations.

1. Press the PRESET ABC button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

* SAT presets are only available on SAT equippedvehicles.



If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orSAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largecities, but many stations are now consideringbroadcasting RDS data.

Program type (PTY):

PTY can be used to search for a certain programtype. Certain areas have a limited number ofstations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-mit call letters and frequencies only.

Searching or scanning by program type may yielda limited number of selections.

When PROG/RPT button is pressed for morethan 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT (if soequipped) mode, the PTY name of the currenttuned station is displayed. During this time if thePTY data code is zero or the data is unreadable,the display will show NONE.

To change the PTY:

1. Press the PROG/RPT button.

2. Press the TUNE button ( or ) tochose a specific program type. Refer to theillustration.

The display will show “SEEK, SCAN?”

SEEK tuning:

3. After selecting a program type, push theSEEK button ( or ) for less than1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning tothe PTY station will start. If you do not pushthe SEEK button within the 10 second pe-riod, the PTY mode will be canceled.

SCAN tuning:

4. Push the or button for morethan 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY namestations and stop at each broadcasting sta-tion for 5 seconds. Pushing the button againduring this 5 second period will stop SCANtuning and the radio will remain tuned to thatstation. If the or button is notpushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuningmoves to the next station.

Compact disc (CD) player operation(Type A)

CAUTION

● Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

LHA0275



Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOLcontrol knob will start the compact disc.

CD button:

When the CD button is pushed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compactdisc loaded but the radio playing, the radio willautomatically be turned off and the compact discwill start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (FastForward):

When the (rewind) or (fast forward)button is pushed while the compact disc is beingplayed, the compact disc will play while rewind-ing or fast forwarding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc will return to normalplay speed.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pushed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pushseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

When the button is pushed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thenext track will start to play from its beginning.Push several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pushed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

When the or button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds, each track will play forabout 10 seconds. To stop playing, pushthe button.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT button is pushed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → 1 DISC RDM→ ALL DISC RPT

ALL DISC RPT: the entire disk will be repeated1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly

REAR ON·OFF:

Pushing the REAR ON·OFF button for less than1.5 seconds turns the rear seat audio controlleron. REAR CONT ON will display. Pushing it againwill turn the rear seat audio controller off. REARCONT OFF will display. If the vehicle is notequipped with a rear seat audio controller, thedisplay will show “REAR AV N/A”.

Pushing the REAR ON·OFF button for more than1.5 seconds will turn the DVD player on (if soequipped).

When the REAR ON·OFF button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds with a DVD loaded andanother audio source playing, the other sourcewill automatically be turned off and the DVD willstart to play.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Push this button to turn the rear speakers off andheadphones on. Push this button again to turnrear seat speakers back on and headphones off.



CD EJECT:

When the button is pushed with the com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation(Type B)

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button.Insert the compact disc into the slot with the labelside facing up. The compact disc will be guidedautomatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOLcontrol knob will start the compact disc.

LOAD button:

CAUTION

Only load one CD into the CD changer at atime.

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the LOADbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Select theloading slot by pushing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push theLOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:


When the CD button is pushed with the compactdisc loaded with the radio playing, the radio willautomatically be turned off and the compact discwill start to play.

REW (Rewind), FF (FastForward):

When the (rewind) or (fast forward)button is pushed while a compact disc is playing,the compact disc will play while rewinding or fastforwarding. When the button is released, thecompact disc will return to normal play speed.


When the CD button is pushed with the compactdisc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, thetape or radio will automatically be turned off andthe compact disc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pushseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pushed.

When the button is pushed for less than 1.5seconds while the compact disc is playing, thenext track will start to play from its beginning.Push several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of times



the button is pushed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

When pushing the or button for morethan 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about10 seconds. To stop playing, pushthe button again.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, push aCD select button (1 – 6).

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

REAR ON·OFF:

Pushing the REAR ON·OFF button for less than1.5 seconds turns the rear seat audio controlleron. REAR CONT ON will display. Pushing it againwill turn the rear seat audio controller off. REARCONT OFF will display. If the vehicle is notequipped with a rear seat audio controller, thedisplay will show “REAR AV N/A”.

Pushing the REAR ON·OFF button for more than1.5 seconds will turn the DVD player on (if soequipped).

When the REAR ON·OFF button is pushed formore than 1.5 seconds with a DVD loaded andanother audio source playing, the other sourcewill automatically be turned off and the DVD willstart to play.



CD EJECT:

Current disc:

● Press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desireddisc, then press the button. The com-pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pushed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.



CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

LHA0049 LHA0550



MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-SET B → PRESET C → CD → DVD (if soequipped).

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,B or C), use the SEEK tuning switch (or ) to select one of the preset radio sta-tions (1-6).

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-tween selections. If there is a blank interval within1 program or there is no interval between pro-grams, the system may not stop in the desired orexpected location.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc upor down.



1. VOL (volume) control button2. MODE select button3. speaker control button4. NEXT button5. SEEK button6. Headphone jacks

7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*

*Red transmitters will be visible wheninfrared headphones are on.

REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if soequipped)

Push the REAR ON·OFF button on the front radiocontrol panel to turn the rear controls on. Pushthe button again to turn rear controls off.

The headphones symbol illuminates on the frontdisplay when the rear audio controls are on. Twoheadphone jacks are provided so two rear seatpassengers may listen to the audio system pri-vately.

The rear volume controls can only increase thevolume to the level at which the front radio volumecontrol is set.

One or two (if so equipped) infrared headphonesare included if the vehicle is equipped with theDVD entertainment system. Most portable radioheadphones work with the rear audio controls.

For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radiowith compact disc player, if the rear passengersturn off the rear speakers and are using head-phones they may choose to listen to a differentmedia than the front passengers. The rear pas-sengers can listen to the radio along with thefront passengers or they can listen to a CD orSAT radio (if so equipped).

LHA0322



VOL (volume) button:

The VOL button allows the rear passengers toadjust the headphone volume level.



MODE button:

The MODE button allows the rear passengers tochange between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX.The media options are listed on the face plate ofthe rear audio controls. When a source of mediais selected, the media label will be illuminated.

SEEK button:

In AM or FM mode the SEEK button allows therear seat passengers to find the next radio stationup or down the station band frequency.

In CD mode the SEEK button allows the rearpassengers to find the next or previous selectionon the CD.

NEXT button:

When the NEXT button is pushed while in AM,FM or SAT mode (if so equipped), the radio willchange to the next preset.

When playing a CD in the CD changer (if soequipped), push the NEXT button to changebetween discs when multiple discs are loaded.

The NEXT button does not function while playinga DVD or single CD.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearpassenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear driver or passenger side windowglass or attach any metal parts to it. Thismay cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the reardriver or passenger side window, becareful not to scratch or damage thewindow antenna. Lightly wipe along theantenna with a dampened soft cloth.

WARNING

● The DVD Entertainment System is de-signed for rear seat passenger viewingonly.

● The driver must not attempt to operatethe DVD Entertainment System whilethe vehicle is in motion so that full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.

LHA0327

DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (if soequipped)



CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe DVD Entertainment System compo-nents. Do not use solvents or cleaningsolutions.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions [below-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

● To avoid draining the vehicle battery, donot operate the system more than 15minutes without starting the engine.

1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. ENTER button4. POWER on/off button5. MODE button6. Input jacks7. STOP button8. PLAY/PAUSE button9. MENU button10. DISPLAY button11. NAVIGATION keys

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLSRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

LHA0316



1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROLRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREEN

The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-trol receiver s1 located at the bottom of thescreen.

On vehicles equipped with 2 screens for secondand third row passengers, both screens will havea remote control receiver.LHA0317

LHA0315



CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Push the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power suppy turned off whennot in use.

NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-mance, increase the volume on the rearseat controller to the maximum level andadjust the infrared headphone volume us-ing the volume control on the headphones.Using a lower volume setting on the rearseat controller can cause static noise in theinfrared headphones.

SAA0720 SAA0721



PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC(DVD)

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

● The driver must not attempt to wear theheadphones while the vehicle is in mo-tion so that full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

● While playing video CD media, this DVDplayer does not guarantee completefunctionality of all video CD formats.

With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the REAR AV button located on the frontcontrols for more than 1.5 seconds to hear thesound of the DVD player through the speakers.

Pushing the button on the front controlsturns the rear speakers on and off.

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

POWER on/off button:

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER button to turn theDVD player on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Push the Mode button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jacks

on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

or PLAY:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PLAY button on the remote control is pushed,the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Remote control only):

Push FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons to carry out the fast forward or fast reversepresentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Push FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons again or PLAY button to resume the normalplay speed.



NEXT CHAPTER/PREVIOUS CHAPTER(Remote control only):

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispushed while the DVD is being played, the pro-gram next to the present one will start to play fromits beginning. Push several times to skip throughprograms. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pushed. Whenthe (PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button ispushed, the program being played returns to itsbeginning. Push several times to skip backthrough programs. The DVD will go back thenumber of times the button is pushed.

or PAUSE:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PAUSE button on the remote control ispushed, the player will pause playing of the me-dia. In pause mode, the player will show onthe upper left corner of the display until the playeris changed to another mode.

STOP:

Push the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAYbutton is pushed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pushed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect itwill ignore the last stored disc position and uponreceipt of the next play message it will begin atthe Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”.

EJECT:

When the EJECT button is pushed with the DVDloaded, it will be ejected.

The display will show the EJECT symbol inthe upper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the EJECT button is pushed.

If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show“NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removed within25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot toprotect it.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pushed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate withinthe display menu, and use ENTER to selectthe item.

● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-plate for longer than approximately 2 sec-onds while in the display menu will reset thedisplay characteristics to their nominal val-ues. (Faceplate feature only)

If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate ispushed for more than 2 seconds, the mediatrack/time information will be displayed along thebottom of the display. Pushing the DISPLAY con-trol for more than 2 seconds will remove themedia track/time information from the display.(Faceplate feature only)

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-verse and fast forward, and the display willshow , , and respec-tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4seconds. (Faceplate feature only)

If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of theNAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow



forward, and the display will show ,and a forward arrow symbol respectively in theupper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.(Faceplate feature only)

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, push the ENTER button to selectMENU items.

In the display menu, push the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear onthe screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu, and use ENTER to select theitem.

Push the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.

TITLE (Remote control only):

Push TITLE button to return the DVD media to the“title” of the DVD.

Push TITLE button again to return to the previousstop point and play.

BACK (Remote control only):

Push the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE (Remote control only):

Push the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO (Remote control only):

Push the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE (Remote control only):

Push the ANGLE button to call up camera anglemenu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR (Remote control only):

Push the CLEAR button to clear all numeric in-puts, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remotecontrol only):

Push the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.

The “≥10” button input numbers greater than orequal to 10, allowing up three digits to be inputfor selecting chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.



Auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the controlpanel. Compatible devices such as video gamescamcorders and portable video players can beconnected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your DVD Entertainment System.(DVD player face, screen, remote control, etc.)

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.

● Do not attempt to use the system inextreme temperature conditions [below-4°F (-20°C) or above 158°F (70°C)].

● Do not attempt to operate the system inextreme humidity conditions (less than10% or more than 75%).

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

LHA0049



● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVD’s as they maycause the DVD player to malfunction:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● DVD’s with a region code other than“1”. The region codesA is displayed in asmall symbol printed on the top of theDVD sB

● DVD’s that are not round

● DVD’s with a paper label

● DVD’s that are warped, scratched, orhave unequal edges

● Recordable digital video discs (DVD-R)

● Rewritable digital video discs (DVD-RW)

If a DVD with a paper label is used andbecomes jammed you may be able to resetthe unit and eject the jammed disc with thefollowing procedure:

1. Record the radio presets

2. Disconnect the negative terminal fromthe battery for five minutes

3. Reconnect the negative battery terminal

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD hasbeen ejected. If it has not, try to ejectthe DVD by pushing the eject button.

5. If the disc cannot be ejected see yourNissan dealer for further assistance

6. Re-program the radio presets

LHA0484



Remote control and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

LHA0318 SAA0723



When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingcautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad-versely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)(for models without MichelinT PAXT tiresonly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)(for models with MichelinT PAXT tires only) . . . . . . . . 5-5Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Traction control system (TCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24


WARNING


● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the lift gate and rear vent windowsclosed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withthe lift gate or rear vent windows open,follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) (for models withoutMichelinT PAXT tires only)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if underinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● This system does not monitor the tire pres-sure of the spare tire.

● The low tire pressure warning system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven at

Starting and driving 5-3


speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, thissystem may not detect a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example a flat tire while driv-ing).

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Low tire pressure warning system” inthe “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section forchanging a flat tire.)


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and thelow tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interface, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired op-eration of the device.



TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) (for models withMichelinT PAXT tires only)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flattires, the warning light will flash continuously anda chime will sound for 10 seconds. The chime willonly sound at the first indication of a flat tire and

the warning light will flash continuously. Whenthe Flat tire warning is activated, have the systemreset and the tire checked and replaced if neces-sary by a NISSAN dealer or authorized MichelinPAX system dealer. Even if the tire is inflated tothe specified COLD tire pressure, the warninglight will continue to flash until the system is resetby a NISSAN dealer.

Your vehicle can be driven for a limited time on aflat tire. See 9Michelin PAX Tires (if so equipped)9in the 9Maintenance and do-it-yourself9 section .

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if underinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● This system does not monitor the tire pres-sure of the spare tire.

● The low tire pressure warning system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, thissystem may not detect a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example a flat tire while driv-ing).

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.



● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audiosystems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Low tire pressure warning system” inthe “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightflashes while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingIn-formation label to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light OFF. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section forchanging a flat tire.)


● Do not drive at speeds above 50 MPH(80 km/h) and do not drive more than125 miles (200 km) with a puncturedMichelinT PAXT tire (if so equipped).The actual distance the vehicle can bedriven on a flat tire depends on outsidetemperature, vehicle load, road condi-tions and other factors.

● Do not tow a trailer when a MichelinTPAXT tire is flat.



CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and thelow tire pressure warning system will notfunction properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interface, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired op-eration of the device.



AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey alltraffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, highspeed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers,because these driving practices could cause youto lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve-hicle, loss of control could result in a colli-sion with other vehicles or objects, or causethe vehicle to roll over, particularly if the lossof control causes the vehicle to slide side-ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the influence ofalcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness).Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the“Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section of this manual, and alsoinstruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot beturned to LOCK position and removed until theshift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) posi-tion.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCKposition.

When the key cannot be turned to the LOCKposition, proceed as follows to remove the key.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH



1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannotmoved out of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.



● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE



AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shifting iscompleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have anaccident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed.

To move the selector lever:

: Push the button while depressing thebrake pedal

: Push the button to shift

: Shift without pushing button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever out of theP (Park) position.

LSD0081

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany D (Drive) position, the shift selector levercannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the keycannot be turned to the LOCK position and beremoved from the ignition switch. If this occurs,perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle isstopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-tion key to the LOCK position to remove thekey.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the se-lector lever from N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then move the shift selector lever into the P(Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selectingthe R (Reverse) position. The brake pedalmust be depressed to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.

Do not shift into the L position at speeds above65 MPH (105 km/h). Do not exceed 65 MPH(105 km/h) in the L position.



Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the 4–speed automatic transmission will belocked in third gear. For the 5–speed automatictransmission, the transmission will be locked inany of the gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignition keyOFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn thekey back to the ON position. The vehicleshould return to its normal operating con-dition. If it does not return to its normaloperating condition, have a NISSAN dealercheck the transmission and repair it if nec-essary.

WSD0083



Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and theshift selector lever in the D (Drive)position, the transmission upshiftsinto Overdrive as vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the Overdrive switchonce. The O/D OFF indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts into and out ofOverdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheO/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelcomes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.This reduces fuel economy.

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.WSD0084

PARKING BRAKE



To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and itwill release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (locatedon the steering wheel). To properly set thecruise control system, use the following pro-cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

LSD0082 LSD0152

CRUISE CONTROL



To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu-tral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).



CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-tion” later in this manual.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: sA

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: sB

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: sC

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will bemuch harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes sothe wheels do not lock when braking abruptly orwhen braking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheel andvaries the brake fluid pressure to prevent eachwheel from locking and sliding. By preventingwheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operationThe anti-lock brake system does not operate atspeeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (Thespeeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock brake system con-trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-

ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve-hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. Thesystem detects the wheel rotation rate and elec-tronically controls the pressure applied to eachbrake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom-panied by noise usually occurs while the ABSsystem is operating. Such vibration and noiseencountered during abrupt braking is not a prob-lem, but indicates that the system is functioningproperly. However, the pulsation may indicatethat road conditions are hazardous and extra careis required while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronicsensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by acomputer. The computer has a built-in diagnosticfeature that tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a low speed inforward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,you may hear a ‘‘clunk’’ noise and/or feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is notan indication of any malfunction. If the computersenses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lockbrake system off and turns on the ABS brakewarning light on the instrument panel. The brakesystem then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self-test or whiledriving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer forrepair.

WARNING

● The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-cidents resulting from careless or dan-gerous driving techniques. It can helpmaintain vehicle control during brakingon slippery surfaces, but remember thatthe stopping distance on slippery sur-faces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with the anti-lock brakesystem. Stopping distances may alsobe longer on rough, gravel or snow cov-ered roads, or if you are using tirechains. Tire type and condition may alsoaffect braking effectiveness. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re-sponsibility for safety of self and othersrests in the hands of the driver.

● Tire type and condition of tires may alsoaffect braking effectiveness.

● When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.



● When installing a spare tire, make sureit is the proper size and type as speci-fied on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label. For tire placard location in-formation, refer to “Tire and LoadingInformation label” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tiremay spin or slip. With the vehicle traction controlsystem (TCS), sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle stability while accelerating.

● When the traction control system is operat-ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panelblinks.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un-der slippery conditions. Be sure to drivecarefully. See “Slip indicator light”and “Trac-tion control system (TCS) off indicator light”in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

● If a malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lightscome on in the meter panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction controlfunction is canceled. The vehicle will behave likea vehicle without the system.

WARNING

● The traction control system is designedto help improve driving stability butdoes not prevent accidents due toabrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the traction control systemmay not operate properly and theindicator light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs and bushingsare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the traction con-trol system may not operate properlyand the indicator light may comeon.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)



● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the traction control system may not op-erate properly and the indicatorlight may come on. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the tractioncontrol system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

● The traction control system is not a sub-stitute for winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detectthese movements and control the braking andengine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system is operating, the slip indicator in theinstrument panel blinks.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi-tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamiccontrol (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-struments and controls” section.

● Indicator lightIf malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lights comeon in the instrument panel.As long as these indicator lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamiccontrol system OFF using the VDC OFF switch,VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC sys-tem will still try to transfer power from a slippingdrive wheel to one with more traction when theVDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicator willflash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will stilloperate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The vehicle dynamic control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)



● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly andthe vehicle dynamic control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not NISSAN approvedfor your vehicle or are extremely dete-riorated the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handlingperformance, and the VDC OFF indica-tor light may come on.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the vehicle dynamic control system maynot operate properly and the VDC OFFindicator light may come on. Do notdrive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the vehicle dynamic control offindicator light may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engineafter driving onto a stable surface

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-namic control system may not operateproperly and the vehicle dynamic con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The vehicle dynamic control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

● Always turn and look back before back-ing. The RSS is not a substitute forproper backing procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe rear sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the RSS; this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.

LSD0088

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if soequipped)



● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumperwhen the shift selector is in R (Reverse). Thesystem may not detect objects at speeds above 3mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angularor moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet (1.8 m)from the rear bumper with a decreased coveragearea at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer tothe illustration for approximate zone coverageareas). As you move closer to the obstacle, therate of the tone increases. When the obstacle isless than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone willsound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-ary or receding object further than 10 inches(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys-tem detects an object approaching, the tone willsound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the gearselector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignitionis ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrumentpanel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off.To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, andthe gear selector in R (Reverse). An indicatorlight on the switch will illuminate when the systemis turned off. If the indicator light illuminates whenthe RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a failurein the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rearbumper fascia) free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensorswith sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, itwill affect the accuracy of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole.

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. Fordetails, see ‘‘Engine cooling system’’ in the ‘‘Main-tenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see ‘‘Battery’’ in the ‘‘Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself’’ section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATERIf the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see ‘‘Changing engine coolant’’ in the‘‘Maintenance and do-it-yourself’’ section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord-ing to location. Check the local laws beforeinstalling tire chains. When installing tirechains, make sure they are the proper sizefor the tires on your vehicle and are installedaccording to the chain manufacturer’s sug-gestions. Use only SAE Class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of a wintertraction device (tire chains or cables). Theminimum clearances are determined usingthe factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain ten-sioners when recommended by the tirechain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.Loose end links of the tire chain must besecured or removed to prevent the possibil-ity of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loadingyour vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehiclehandling and performance may be adverselyaffected.

Never install tire chains on spare tires. Donot use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.



● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.




MEMO

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Low tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12


For vehicles equipped with MichelinT PAXT tires,the vehicle can be driven for a limited time on aflat tire, see 9Michelin PAX Tires (if so equipped)9in the 9Maintenance and do-it-yourself9 section.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-sure warning system. It monitors tire pressure ofall tires except the spare. When the low tirepressure warning light is lit or flashing continu-ously, one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. If equipped, the system also dis-plays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire)on the display screen by sending a signal from asensor that is installed in each wheel. If the ve-hicle is being driven with low tire pressure, thelow tire pressure warning system will activate andwarn you of it by the low tire pressure warninglight. This system will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tirepressure information” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion and “Low tire pressure warning system” inthe “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.



● Do not tow a trailer when a MichelinTPAXT (if so equipped) tire is flat.



FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.


Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

WCE0044

In case of emergency 6-3


Getting the spare tire and tools1. Tip up the passenger side second row cap-

tain’s chair. Refer to “Tip up for easy entry to3rd row” in the “Safety — seats, seat beltsand supplemental restraint system” sectionof this owner’s manual.

2. Lift up the floor carpeting and remove thejack.

3. Stow the center tray table (if so equipped).

4. Move both front seats as forward as pos-sible.

5. Lift up the floor carpeting s1 . Remove thespare tire cover s2 and jack tool kit.

6. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and re-move the spare tire.

Removing wheel cover (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover orwheel surface.

LCE0078

LCE0079



Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

WSD0085



Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

WCE0081 WCE0056



4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ,sE ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehiclehas been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thespecified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display of the tire pres-sure information may show higher pres-sure than the COLD tire pressure after thevehicle has been driven more than 1 mile(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressur-izes as the tire temperature rises. This doesnot indicate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING



● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Shift the transmis-sion into P (Park). Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

WCE0054



● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Attempt-ing to do so may cause transmissiondamage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the rear wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe front wheels.

● When towing with the front wheels ontowing dollies:

WSD0086

WSD0087



– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing automatic with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Front

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow the vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

WCE0120



3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.




MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable tothe effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

● If the surface does not polish easily, use a“road tar” remover and wax again.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELSWash the wheels regularly, especially during win-ter months in areas where road salt is used. If notremoved, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily with anoil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3


Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leathersurfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened inmild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry,soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fab-ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean-ing fluids, solvents, detergents orammonia-based cleaners as they maydamage the leather’s natural finish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

WAI0006

CLEANING INTERIOR



SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5


● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

4-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Temperature conditions for checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure it has the properdistance under it when depressed fully. Check

the brake booster function. Be certain to keep thefloor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake* Check that the lever/pedal hasthe proper travel and confirm that your vehicle isheld securely on a fairly steep hill with only theparking brake applied.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

4–speed automatic transmission fluidlevel* Check the level after putting the selectorlever in P with the engine idling at operatingtemperature.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selectorlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoid injury,always disconnect the negative batterycable before working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner5. Battery6. Fuse/fusible link box7. Transmission dipstick8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Fuse block11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

LII0017

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freezesolution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.Additional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

LDI0350

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

LDI0351 LDI0352

ENGINE OIL



CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it coun-terclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

WDI0216



7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrenchby turning it counterclockwise. Then removethe oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surfacewith a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the mounting surface of theengine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

WDI0218



WARNING

● When the engine is running, keephands, jewelry and clothing away fromany moving parts such as the coolingfan and drive belts.

● Automatic transmission fluid is poison-ous and should be stored carefully inmarked containers out of the reach ofchildren.

TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FORCHECKING

● The fluid level should be checked using theHOT range on the dipstick after the followingconditions have been met:

– The engine should be warmed up to op-erating temperature.

– The vehicle should be driven at least 5minutes.

– The automatic transmission fluid shouldbe warmed to 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C).

● The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera-tures of 86 - 122°F (30 - 50°C) using theCOLD range on the dipstick after the engineis warmed up and before driving. However,the fluid should be re-checked using theHOT range.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and setthe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and then move the shiftselector lever through each gear range, end-ing in P (Park).

3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.

LDI0353

4-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID



4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean withlint-free paper.

5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tubeas far as it will go.

6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. Ifthe automatic transmission fluid level iswithin the normal operating range sB , noadditional fluid is required. If the fluid level islow sA add fluid through the dipstick tube.

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY GenuineNissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. andAlaska) or Canada NISSAN AutomaticTransmission Fluid. DEXRON™III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also beused. Outside the continental UnitedStates and Alaska contact a NISSAN deal-ership for more information regardingsuitable fluids, including recommendedbrand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ au-tomatic transmission fluid.

NOTE:

If the vehicle has been driven for a longtime at high speeds, or in city traffic in hotweather, or if it is being used to pull atrailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu-rately. You should wait until the fluid hascooled down (about 30 minutes) beforechecking fluid level.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING

● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic KATF will cause deterioration in drive-ability and automatic transmission du-rability, and may damage the automatictransmission, which is not covered bythe NISSAN new vehicle limitedwarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

WDI0334

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID



The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill throughthe opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake system. The use ofimproper fluids can damage the brakesystem and affect the vehicle’s stoppingability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WDI0256 LDI0354

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID



WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with a solu-tion of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

LDI0355

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY



● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

WDI0224

LDI0302



Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Crankshaft3. Generator4. Air conditioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If thebelt is in poor condition or is loose, have itreplaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0226

DRIVE BELTS



REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tippedspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

s1 Loosen the screw.

s2 Disconnect the electrical connector.

s3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleanercover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

WDI0005 LDI0357

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER



WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.



CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0194

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



Be careful not to let anything get into the washernozzle sA . This may cause clogging or improperwindshield washer operation. If something getsinto the nozzle, remove it with a needle or smallpin sB .

WDI0337



Rear window wiper blade

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

s2 Push the wiper blade in and pivot until theblade becomes free.

s3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

LDI0356



CHECKING PARKING BRAKEFrom the released position, firmly push the park-ing brake down. If the number of clicks is out ofthe range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.

● 5–6 clicks under depressing force of 44 lb(196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance Abetween the upper surface of the pedal and themetal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see aNISSAN dealer.

Distance A: Under depression force of110 lb (490 N)

3 1/2 in (90 mm) or more

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0293 WDI0229

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL



BRAKE BOOSTERCheck the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release thebrake pedal several times. When brakepedal movement (distance of travel) remainsthe same from one pedal application to thenext, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start theengine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop theengine. Keep the pedal depressed for about30 seconds. The pedal height should notchange.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times. Thepedal travel distance will decrease graduallywith each depression as the vacuum is re-leased from the booster.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0358

FUSES



5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a knowngood fuse sB .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0452 LDI0359Type A

WDI0452



Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin sA .

s2 Remove the battery sB .

s3 Install a new battery sC with the “+” facingdown.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

Type BLDI0456

LDI0484

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT



If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.


Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Ifreplacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Low beam:Wattage: 51Bulb no.: 9006*

High beam:Wattage: 60Bulb no.: 9005*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Wattage 55 Bulb No. H11*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

LIGHTS



● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog lightfor a long period of time as dust, mois-ture and smoke may enter the fog lightbody and affect the performance of thefog light.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. Remove the three splash shield screws andmove the splash shield out of the way.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector.

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the foglight assembly. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it. Do not touch theglass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LDI0362



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assemblyHigh 60 HB3/9005Low* 51 HB4/9006Park/Turn* 8/29 3457Cornering* 27 3156

Front fog light 55 H11Puddle lamp* 8 —Room/map lights 8 PLW 578Personal lights

Base model 8 TS578Airplane type 8 2GL T2P

Footwell 3.4 158Glove box light 3.4 158Vanity mirror light* 1.32 —Step light 3.8 194Cargo light 7 N1JHigh-mounted stop light* 13 912Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 7/27 3157KBackup (reversing) 18 921KTurn 27 3156K

License plate light* 5 W5W

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at aNISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.



1. Room/map light2. Front personal lights3. Step light4. Puddle lamp5. High-mount stoplight6. Cargo light7. License plate light8. Rear combination light9. Headlight assembly10. Fog light

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installationLDI0360

WDI0263



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.Room/map lights

LDI0363

Personal lights – Type ALDI0364

Personal lights – Type BLDI0365



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.Step light

LDI0341

Cargo lightLDI0366

Rear combination lightLDI0367



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Low tire pressure warning systemThis vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-sure warning system. It monitors tire pressure ofall tires except the spare. When the low tirepressure monitoring system warning light is lit orflashing continuously, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. If equipped, the sys-tem also displays pressure of all tires (except thespare tire) on the display screen by sending asignal from a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The low tire pressure warning system will activateonly when the vehicle is driven at speeds above20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this system may notdetect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for ex-ample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warn-ing light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion, ”Tire pressure information” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-tems” section, “Low tire pressure warning sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section, and“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on the FM-VSS label or the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if so equipped) underthe 9Recommended Cold Tire InflationPressure9 heading. The Tire and LoadingInformation label is affixed to the driverside center pillar. Tire pressures shouldbe checked regularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Maximum Weight rat-ing is located on the FMVSS la-bel. The vehicle weight capacityis indicated on the Tire and Load-ing Information label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result in

WDI0210

WHEELS AND TIRES



reduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-ure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Type ALDI0485



Tire and loading information label (forUS)

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that should beseated in the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Recommended cold tire inflationpressure: Inflate the tires to this pres-sure when the tires are cold. Tires areconsidered COLD after the vehiclehas been parked for 3 or more hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) atmoderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicles GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

s6 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped).

Type BLDI0486



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingof air escaping from the tire is heardwhile checking the pressure, reposi-tion the gauge to eliminate this leak-age.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:P225/65/R16P225/60/R17225-700R480A

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P225/65/R16P225/60/R17225-700R480A

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:T135/80D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

LDI0393



TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles.

2. Three-digit number: This numbergives the width in millimeters of thetire from sidewall edge to sidewalledge.

3. Two-digit number: This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number: This number is thewheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number: Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

WDI0394 WDI0395



MichelinT PAXT Tire size (example: 225-700R480A 100H)

1. Three-digit number: This numbergives the width in millimeters of thetire from sidewall edge to sidewalledge.

2. Three-digit number: This numbergives the outside diameter of the tirein millimeters.

3. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

4. Three-digit number: This is the rimdiameter in millimeters.

5. A: The “A” stands for asymmetricseating of the wheel and tire.

6. Two- or three-digit number: Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

LDI0483



s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-ment Of Transportation.9 The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of ”tubeless” or ”tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

s7 The word ”radial”

WDI0396



The word 9radial9 is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the low tire pres-sure warning system.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.



If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

MichelinT PAXT TIRES (if soequipped)

Michelin PAX tires are those tires that can beused temporarily if they are punctured. The tire isequipped with an inner support ring that allowsthe vehicle to be driven if the tire is under-inflatedor flat. The vehicle can be driven up to 125 miles(200 km) if one or more of the tires is punctured.Replace the punctured tire at the nearestNISSAN dealer or authorized Michelin PAX sys-tem dealer. Contact 1-877 PAXTIRE (1-877-729-8473) to find the closest location to havethe punctured tire replaced.

It can be difficult to tell if a Michelin PAX isunder-inflated or flat. Check the tire pressures asdescribed earlier in this section. If the tire be-

comes under-inflated or flat while driving, the lowtire pressure warning light will come on or flashcontinuously.

Low tire pressure:If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, the low tire pressure warning light will illu-minate.

Flat tire:If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flattires, the low tire pressure warning light will flashcontinuously and a chime will sound for 10 sec-onds.

The chime will only sound at the first indication ofa flat tire and the warning light will flash continu-ously. When the Flat tire warning is activated,have the system reset and the tire checked andreplaced if necessary by a NISSAN dealer orauthorized Michelin PAX system dealer. Even ifthe tire is inflated to the specified COLD tirepressure, the warning light will continue to flashuntil the system is reset by a NISSAN dealer.

If the low tire pressure warning light comes on:

● Do not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Increase your following distance to allow forincreased stopping distances.

● Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard corneringand hard braking.

● Do not tow a trailer.

WARNING



● Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoidhard cornering or braking, which maycause you to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not tow a trailer when a MichelinTPAXT tire is flat.

CAUTION

● Never install tire chains on a puncturedMichelinT PAXT tire, as this could dam-age your vehicle.



● Avoid driving over any projection orpothole, as the clearance between thevehicle and the ground is smaller thannormal.

● Do not enter an automated car washwith a punctured MichelinT PAXT tire.

● Have the punctured tire replaced byyour NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-sible, as the tire’s performance capabil-ity is reduced.

● Do not have your tire replaced or re-paired by a facility that is not a Mich-elinT PAXT tire authorized facility.

● Do not mix conventional wheels andtires with PAXT system wheels andtires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenrecommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Michelin PAXsystem, contact your NISSAN dealer for the tirechains that will fit the PAX tire. The tire chainselection is limited due to the PAX system tiresize.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258



Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


Tire age

Remember, tires age. Never use a tire over sixyears old, regardless of whether it has been usedor not.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WDI0259



WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.


● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.



Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.



9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-21Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-22

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure LiterFuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1Engine oil *8

Drain and RefillWith oil filter change 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 • API Certification Mark *2 *3

• API grade SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3• ILSAC grade GF-III*2 *3

Without oil filterchange

3-7/8 qt 3-1/4 qt 3.7

Cooling systemWith reservoir 2-3/4 gal 2-3/8 gal 10.5 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled waterAutomatic transmission fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the in-structions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

4 Speed Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Auto-matic Transmission Fluid.*4

5 Speed Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *5Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*9Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*6 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*7Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent*7Windshield washer fluid (shared betweenfront and rear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: For further details, see “Recommended SAE engine oil viscosity.”*4: DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also be used. Outside the Continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitablefluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ Automatic Transmission Fluid.*5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the auto-matic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*6: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*7: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”*8: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”*9: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec-ommends the use of unleaded premium gasolinewith an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number(Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter specificationswhere it is available. Many of the automobilemanufacturers developed this specification toimprove emission system and vehicle perfor-mance. Ask your service station manager if thegasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charterspecifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other than metha-nol blend is used, it should contain nomore than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may,however, be added up to 15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

Technical and consumer information 9-3


or deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose engine oil with the cor-rect quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. NISSAN recom-mends the use of a low friction oil (energy con-serving oil) in order to improve fuel economy andconserve energy. Oils which do not have thespecified quality label should not be used as theycould cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American Petro-leum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on

the front of the container should be used. Thistype of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, orSJ and Energy Conserving II categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTI-FICATION MARK, use API grade SL EnergyConserving oil. An oil with a single designationSL, or in combination with other categories (forexample, SL/CF) may also be used if one with theAPI CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. AnILSAC grade GF-III oil can also be used.

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. Theseoils must, however, meet the API quality and SAEviscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-ommended SAE viscosity number” shows therecommended oil viscosities for the expectedambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosityother than that recommended could cause seri-ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

WTI0082



Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alltemperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if theambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil DH-PS or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.

ATI1028



ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

See the “Emission Control Information label” on the under-side of the hood.

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug

Standard PLFR5A-11

Hot PLFR4A-11

Cold PLFR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

16 x 6.5JJ

17 x 6.5JJ

Tires

P225/65R16

P225/60R17

225-700R480A

Spare tire T135/80*16

Speed rating 16” H

17” H

PAX system H

*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 204.13(5,185)

Overall width in (mm) 77.64(1,972)

Overall height

with roof rack in (mm) 71.90(1,826)

without roof rack in (mm) 70.0 (1,778)

Front tread in (mm) 67.32(1,710)

Rear tread in (mm) 67.32(1,710)

Wheelbase in (mm) 124.02(3,150)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S.certification label” on thecenter pillar between thedriver’s side front andside doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0077 LTI0083

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached as shown.

WTI0049 LTI0078 LTI0079



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed asshown.

LTI0084 WTI0156

LTI0081

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm thatthe following parts are enclosed in the plasticbag:

● License plate bracket

● License plate bracket screws x 2

● License plate screws x 2

● Screw grommets x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia atthe location marks (small dimples) using a0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging thearea behind the fascia, apply only light pres-sure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in thebumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver intothe grommet hole to turn the threaded part ofthe grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using thetwo longer screws.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws tomount the license plate to the license platebracket.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total weight (load)limit specified for the vehicle.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as 9The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo9 on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as9Seating Capacity9 on Tire and LoadingInformation label.

To get 9the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo9, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown below.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX lbs” onyour vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 * 150) =650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 * 70) = 300kg.)

LTI0152



5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthe you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on the F.M-.V.S.S. certification label.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the Towing Load/SpecificationChart found later in this section. The total trailerload equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

Towing loads greater than specified or usingimproper towing equipment could adversely af-fect vehicle handling, braking and performance.The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced on very steep grades or in low tractionsituations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 9 - 11 percent ofthe total trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following TowingLoad/Specification Chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

CA0009

TOWING A TRAILER



Maximum gross vehicle weight/maximum gross axle weightThe gross vehicle weight of the towing vehiclemust not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certificationlabel. The gross vehicle weight equals the com-bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen-gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and anyother optional equipment. In addition, front or reargross axle weight must not exceed the gross axleweight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S.certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD

3,500 (1,587)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

350 (158)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle, to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Sway control deviceSway control devices are used to help control theeffects of sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, andbuffeting caused by other vehicles. Make sure thesway control device is compatible with the trail-er’s brake system.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

TI1012M



CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. A genuine NISSAN trailer towharness is available from your NISSAN dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half.



● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. Some states or provinces have spe-cific speed limits for vehicles that are towingtrailers. Obey the local speed limits.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

● Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope isnot recommended; however, if you must doso, and if your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission, first block thewheels and apply the parking brake, andthen move the transmission shift selectorlever into the P (Park) position. If you movethe shift selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion before blocking the wheels and applyingthe parking brake, transmission damagecould occur.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating.

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles that you do tow, donot drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmlygrip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-hicle speed. This combination will help sta-bilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must



also pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not use5th gear (manual transmission) or overdrive(automatic transmission).

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● Do not use cruise control while towing atrailer.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

When towing a trailer, transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon tire wear rate when tested under controlledconditions on specified government test courses.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100. However,relative tire performance depends on actual driv-ing conditions, and may vary significantly due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The traction grade assigned to your ve-hicle tires is based on straight-aheadbraking traction tests and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplan-ing or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, andC. They represent a tire’s resistance to heatbuild-up, and its ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause tire material to degenerate,reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures canlead to sudden tire failure. Grade C correspondsto a performance level which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades A and B rep-resent higher levels of performance on laboratorytest wheels than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY



If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236. You may also write to: NHTSA,U.S. Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoobtain other information about motor ve-hicle safety from the Hotline.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput-ers that monitor and control a number of systemsto optimize performance and help service techni-cians with diagnosis and repair. Depending onthe equipment on your vehicle, some of the com-puters monitor emission control systems, brakingsystems, engine systems, transmission systems,tire pressure systems, and airbag systems. Somedata about vehicle operation may be stored in thecomputers for use during servicing. Other datamay be stored if a crash event occurs. For ex-ample, air bag readiness, air bag performance,and seat belt use by the driver or passenger maybe recorded, depending on vehicle equipment.These types of systems are sometimes calledEvent Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access theelectronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’scomputers (sounds are not recorded). NISSANand NISSAN dealers have equipment to accesssome of this data; others may also have thisequipment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent of thevehicle owner or lessee, in response to a requestby law enforcement, or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com.




MEMO

10 Index

A

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Air bag(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-49Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-55Side and curtain (See supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-11Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-30Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-37Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-40Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-14Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . .5-19

Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-8Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

AM-FM-SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44AM-FM-SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-49Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-47Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-51

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-24Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-41Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-11Automatic transmission position indicatorlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-10Transmission selector lever lock release .5-12

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-22

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Bench seat adjustment (3rd row) . . . .1-8, 1-12Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44

BrakeAnti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . .5-19Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-28Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-14, 8-22Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-13Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Brightness/Contrast button . . . .4-7, 4-15, 4-25

Control panel buttons . . . . .4-7, 4-15, 4-25Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Captain’s chair adjustment (2nd row). . . . . .1-6Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-49CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-47Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-38


Child restraints . . . . . . .1-17, 1-18, 1-25, 1-37Precautions on child restraints . . .1-25, 1-44Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-39

Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-9Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock

(models with navigation system) . .4-14, 4-23(models without navigation system) . . . . .4-4

Clock setControl panel buttons . . . . .4-4, 4-14, 4-23

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Control panel buttons

With navigation system . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-16Without navigation system. . . . . . . . . .4-2

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-51Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-37Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-40

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 2-36Curtain side-impact air bag system(See supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . .1-60

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Display controls(see control panel buttons) . . . . .4-2, 4-8, 4-16Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-24Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-10Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

DVD entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . .4-54

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-20Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-8Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

English/Metric button . . . . . . .4-4, 4-14, 4-23Control panel buttons . . . . .4-4, 4-14, 4-23

ENTER button . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-3, 4-8, 4-16Enter button

Control panel buttons . . .4-2, 4-3, 4-8, 4-16Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-23Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-11Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

10-2


F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-55Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-18

FUEL ECON button . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-9, 4-17Fuel Econ button

Control panel buttons . . . . . .4-4, 4-9, 4-17Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Garment hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

H

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-23Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-19Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Headphones(See DVD entertainment system) . . . . . . .4-57Headrest storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-37Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-38Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-40

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-47Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-22Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-22Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2Interior lights(see Lights on demand switch) . . . . . . . .2-44ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-9

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-63

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-11

10-3


Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-28Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-19Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-19Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-9Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-11Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-57Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Lights on demand switch. . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Lock

Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . .3-9Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-18Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-9Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-11Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

Main ON/OFF switch(for power doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-14Maint (maintenance) button

Control panel buttons . . . . . .4-5, 4-9, 4-18Maint (Maintenance) button, controlpanel display . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-9, 4-18Maintenance

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-22Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-22Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system. . .2-15, 3-2,5-8

Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-22Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

P

ParkingParking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-13Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

10-4


Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on child restraints . . .1-25, 1-44Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-15Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . . . .1-62PREV button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-8, 4-16Prev button

Control panel buttons . . . . . .4-3, 4-8, 4-16Programmable features . . .4-17, 4-6, 4-12, 4-20Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-49Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-51

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . .2-25Rear view monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-17

RecordersEvent data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Remote controller(See DVD entertainment system) . . . . . . .4-56Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-9Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-21

S

SafetyChild safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . .3-9Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-44Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-21

Screen (See DVD entertainment system) . . .4-56Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5Second row captain’s chair . . . . . . . . .1-6Third row bench seat . . . . . . . . .1-8, 1-12

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-18Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-15Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . .1-62Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-24Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-19

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-24Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Second row captain’s chair adjustment. . . . .1-6Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Setting button

SETTING button . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-12, 4-20Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Shifting

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . .5-10Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-24Side air bag system (See supplemental sideair bag and curtain side-impact air bagsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60SkyView™ roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Sliding door

Manual sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Sliding door locksChild safety sliding door locks. . . . . . . .3-9

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-9Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

10-5


Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Startup ScreenControl panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Startup screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17Steering

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-51Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Storage bin . . . . . . . . .2-30, 2-34, 2-37, 2-38Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 2-29Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-63Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-63, 2-11Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-55Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-63Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-49Supplemental side and curtain side-impactair bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-41Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-23

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-19Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-19Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Lights on demand switch. . . . . . . . . .2-44Main ON/OFF switch(for power doors) . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-14Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . .2-25Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Traction control system (TCS) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-16

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Third row bench seat adjustment. . . . .1-8, 1-12Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-44Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-19Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-9

Tire pressure display . . . . .4-5, 4-5, 4-11, 4-19Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . .5-3, 5-5Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . . .4-5, 4-5,

4-11, 4-19Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-38Towing

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-16Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-25Transceiver

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-47Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-11Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-10Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-12

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9TRIP button. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-9, 4-17Trip button

Control panel buttons . . . . . .4-3, 4-9, 4-17Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

10-6


U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-19

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-25Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-21Vehicle electronicsystem . . . . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-21, 4-13, 4-21Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle security system(NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-8Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-11Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-8Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-8Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-23Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-9Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-11Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-57Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-14Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-63Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-16

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-41Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-16Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switches.2-17Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-16Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

10-7


MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

RECOMMENDED FUEL:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For improved performance, NISSAN recom-mends the use of unleaded premium gasolinewith an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number(Research octane number 96).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● API Certification Mark

● API grade SL, Energy Conserving

● ILSAC grade GF-III

● 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Z b15—nna -Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)05/27/05—tbrooks X

1. Engine oil 8-8

2. Window washer fluid 8-14

3. Engine coolant 8-7

4. Power steering fluid 8-13

5. Meters and gauges 2-3

6. Audio system 4-41; Climate controls 4-28,4-37

7. Spare tire 6-2

8. Fuel-filler door release 3-18; Fuel recom-mendation 9-3

9. Keys 3-2

10. Seat belts 1-15

11. Front seats 1-2

12. Hood release 3-13

13. Brake fluid 8-13

14. Battery 8-14

15. Automatic transmission fluid 8-11, 8-12

LGS0019

QUICK REFERENCE

10-14 Filling information

Z max—nna -Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)05/27/05—tbrooks X

Automotive

2006 QUEST OWNER'S MANUAL